Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/options.txt @ 15187:0cfd0fb15db0
Added tag v8.1.0603 for changeset 2b15ee496cbd712830e91b42e9e1891112a15233
author | Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org> |
---|---|
date | Sun, 16 Dec 2018 16:30:06 +0100 |
parents | bc1a8d21c811 |
children | 690da0a83419 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
13963 | 1 *options.txt* For Vim version 8.1. Last change: 2018 May 15 |
7 | 2 |
3 | |
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
5 | |
6 | |
7 Options *options* | |
8 | |
9 1. Setting options |set-option| | |
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting| | |
11 3. Options summary |option-summary| | |
12 | |
10244
876fbdd84e52
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ec618c9feac4573b154510236ad8121c77d0eca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10218
diff
changeset
|
13 For an overview of options see quickref.txt |option-list|. |
7 | 14 |
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to | |
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms: | |
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle* | |
18 number has a numeric value | |
19 string has a string value | |
20 | |
21 ============================================================================== | |
523 | 22 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764* |
7 | 23 |
24 *:se* *:set* | |
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value. | |
26 | |
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options. | |
28 | |
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the | |
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated | |
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal | |
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either... | |
33 | |
34 *E518* *E519* | |
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}. | |
36 | |
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on. | |
38 Number option: show value. | |
39 String option: show value. | |
40 | |
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off. | |
42 | |
2152 | 43 *:set-!* *:set-inv* |
7 | 44 :se[t] {option}! or |
45 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi} | |
46 | |
47 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim* | |
48 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the | |
49 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi} | |
50 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi} | |
51 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi} | |
52 | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
53 :se[t] all& Set all options to their default value. The values of |
7051
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
54 these options are not changed: |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
55 all terminal options, starting with t_ |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
56 'columns' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
57 'cryptmethod' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
58 'encoding' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
59 'key' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
60 'lines' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
61 'term' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
62 'ttymouse' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
63 'ttytype' |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
64 Warning: This may have a lot of side effects. |
eff26a8620ce
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/88774fdd23f08355297bb8cda78856859051d3c7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
6949
diff
changeset
|
65 {not in Vi} |
7 | 66 |
67 *:set-args* *E487* *E521* | |
68 :se[t] {option}={value} or | |
69 :se[t] {option}:{value} | |
70 Set string or number option to {value}. | |
71 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal, | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
72 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0'). |
7 | 73 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by |
74 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is | |
75 set). See |cmdline-completion|. | |
76 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and | |
77 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value} | |
78 is not allowed. | |
79 See |option-backslash| for using white space and | |
80 backslashes in {value}. | |
81 | |
82 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=* | |
83 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the | |
84 {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
85 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
86 value was empty. | |
87 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags | |
557 | 88 are removed. When adding a flag that was already |
89 present the option value doesn't change. | |
809 | 90 Also see |:set-args| above. |
7 | 91 {not in Vi} |
92 | |
93 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=* | |
94 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend | |
95 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a | |
96 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the | |
97 value was empty. | |
98 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
99 {not in Vi} | |
100 | |
101 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=* | |
102 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove | |
103 the {value} from a string option, if it is there. | |
104 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there | |
105 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma | |
106 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option | |
107 becomes empty. | |
108 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be | |
109 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags | |
110 one by one to avoid problems. | |
111 Also see |:set-args| above. | |
112 {not in Vi} | |
113 | |
114 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: > | |
115 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3 | |
116 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given | |
117 and the following arguments will be ignored. | |
118 | |
119 *:set-verbose* | |
120 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it | |
121 was last set. Example: > | |
122 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent? | |
14864 | 123 < shiftwidth=4 ~ |
124 Last set from modeline line 1 ~ | |
125 cindent ~ | |
126 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim line 30 ~ | |
1621 | 127 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose |
128 set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument. | |
129 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. | |
7 | 130 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or |
131 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported. | |
132 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting | |
133 'compatible'. | |
1621 | 134 A few special texts: |
14864 | 135 Last set from modeline line 1 ~ |
1621 | 136 Option was set in a |modeline|. |
137 Last set from --cmd argument ~ | |
138 Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +. | |
139 Last set from -c argument ~ | |
140 Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or | |
141 |-q|. | |
142 Last set from environment variable ~ | |
143 Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT, | |
144 $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT. | |
145 Last set from error handler ~ | |
146 Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error. | |
147 | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
148 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature} |
7 | 149 |
150 *:set-termcap* *E522* | |
667 | 151 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option. This will |
7 | 152 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If |
153 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: > | |
154 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot | |
155 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For | |
156 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: > | |
157 :set <M-b>=^[b | |
158 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it) | |
159 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations. | |
160 | |
2726 | 161 You can define any key codes, e.g.: > |
162 :set t_xy=^[foo; | |
163 There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized. You can map these | |
164 codes as you like: > | |
165 :map <t_xy> something | |
166 < *E846* | |
167 When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist. Trying to get its | |
168 value will result in an error: > | |
169 :set t_kb= | |
170 :set t_kb | |
171 E846: Key code not set: t_kb | |
172 | |
36 | 173 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
174 security reasons. | |
175 | |
7 | 176 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put |
10 | 177 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of |
7 | 178 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the |
179 |more-prompt|. | |
180 | |
181 *option-backslash* | |
182 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a | |
183 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this | |
184 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded | |
185 down). | |
186 A few examples: > | |
187 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags" | |
188 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file" | |
189 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file" | |
190 | |
10 | 191 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To |
192 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the | |
7 | 193 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": > |
194 :set titlestring=hi\|there | |
195 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": > | |
196 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there | |
197 | |
642 | 198 Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment. To include the '"' in |
199 the option value, use '\"' instead. This example sets the 'titlestring' | |
200 option to 'hi "there"': > | |
201 :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\" | |
202 | |
10 | 203 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More |
7 | 204 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment |
205 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not | |
206 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma, | |
207 etc.) is used like explained above. | |
208 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": > | |
209 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
210 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path" | |
211 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!) | |
212 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes | |
213 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be | |
10 | 214 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a |
7 | 215 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it. |
216 | |
217 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags* | |
218 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552* | |
219 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an | |
220 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: > | |
221 :set guioptions+=a | |
222 Remove a flag from an option like this: > | |
223 :set guioptions-=a | |
224 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'. | |
10 | 225 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has |
7 | 226 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba" |
227 doesn't appear. | |
228 | |
229 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var* | |
22 | 230 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the |
7 | 231 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable |
232 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name | |
233 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may | |
234 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is | |
235 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: > | |
236 :set term=$TERM.new | |
237 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,. | |
238 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set | |
239 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing. | |
240 | |
241 | |
242 Handling of local options *local-options* | |
243 | |
244 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
245 has its own copy of this option, thus each can have its own value. This |
7 | 246 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set |
247 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another. | |
248 | |
249 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific | |
250 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses | |
251 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user | |
252 expects is a bit complicated... | |
253 | |
254 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus | |
255 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same. | |
256 | |
257 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since | |
258 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer, | |
259 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a | |
260 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and | |
261 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed, | |
262 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer. | |
263 | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
264 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the options from the window |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
265 that was last closed are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
266 window, the values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
267 last closed window where the buffer was edited last are used. |
7 | 268 |
269 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer. | |
270 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep | |
271 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the | |
272 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window | |
273 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but | |
274 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: > | |
275 :e one | |
276 :set list | |
277 :e two | |
278 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list" | |
279 command you have also set the global value. > | |
280 :set nolist | |
281 :e one | |
282 :setlocal list | |
283 :e two | |
284 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global | |
285 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the | |
286 global value. Note that if you do this next: > | |
287 :e one | |
4358 | 288 You will get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited "one". |
289 The options local to a window are remembered for each buffer. This also | |
290 happens when the buffer is not loaded, but they are lost when the buffer is | |
291 wiped out |:bwipe|. | |
7 | 292 |
293 *:setl* *:setlocal* | |
294 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the | |
295 current buffer or window. Not all options have a | |
296 local value. If the option does not have a local | |
297 value the global value is set. | |
2413 | 298 With the "all" argument: display local values for all |
299 local options. | |
300 Without argument: Display local values for all local | |
301 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 302 When displaying a specific local option, show the |
1621 | 303 local value. For a global/local boolean option, when |
304 the global value is being used, "--" is displayed | |
305 before the option name. | |
306 For a global option the global value is | |
7 | 307 shown (but that might change in the future). |
308 {not in Vi} | |
309 | |
809 | 310 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value by |
311 copying the value. | |
312 {not in Vi} | |
313 | |
3281 | 314 :se[t] {option}< For |global-local| options: Remove the local value of |
315 {option}, so that the global value will be used. | |
7 | 316 {not in Vi} |
317 | |
318 *:setg* *:setglobal* | |
319 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local | |
320 option without changing the local value. | |
321 When displaying an option, the global value is shown. | |
2413 | 322 With the "all" argument: display global values for all |
323 local options. | |
324 Without argument: display global values for all local | |
325 options which are different from the default. | |
7 | 326 {not in Vi} |
327 | |
328 For buffer-local and window-local options: | |
329 Command global value local value ~ | |
330 :set option=value set set | |
331 :setlocal option=value - set | |
332 :setglobal option=value set - | |
333 :set option? - display | |
334 :setlocal option? - display | |
335 :setglobal option? display - | |
336 | |
337 | |
338 Global options with a local value *global-local* | |
339 | |
40 | 340 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows. |
341 For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. | |
342 You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then | |
343 use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global | |
344 value. | |
7 | 345 |
346 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global | |
347 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: > | |
348 :set makeprg=gmake | |
349 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set | |
350 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too. | |
351 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use | |
1152 | 352 another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source |
10 | 353 files. You use this command: > |
7 | 354 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake |
355 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: > | |
356 :setlocal makeprg= | |
357 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the | |
358 "<" flag, like this: > | |
359 :setlocal autoread< | |
360 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the | |
361 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters | |
809 | 362 when the global value changes later). You can also use: > |
363 :set path< | |
364 This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is | |
365 used. Thus it does the same as: > | |
366 :setlocal path= | |
7 | 367 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using |
368 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then. | |
369 | |
370 | |
371 Setting the filetype | |
372 | |
11473 | 373 :setf[iletype] [FALLBACK] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype* |
7 | 374 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if |
375 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands. | |
376 This is short for: > | |
377 :if !did_filetype() | |
378 : setlocal filetype={filetype} | |
379 :endif | |
380 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid | |
381 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different | |
382 settings and syntax files to be loaded. | |
11473 | 383 |
384 When the optional FALLBACK argument is present, a | |
385 later :setfiletype command will override the | |
386 'filetype'. This is to used for filetype detections | |
387 that are just a guess. |did_filetype()| will return | |
388 false after this command. | |
389 | |
7 | 390 {not in Vi} |
391 | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
392 *option-window* *optwin* |
7 | 393 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options* |
394 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options. | |
395 Options are grouped by function. | |
396 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the | |
397 short help to open a help window with more help for | |
398 the option. | |
399 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the | |
400 "set" line to set the new value. For window and | |
401 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is | |
402 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help | |
403 window, in which case the window below help window is | |
404 used (skipping the option-window). | |
13437 | 405 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
406 feature} | |
7 | 407 |
408 *$HOME* | |
409 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an | |
410 option and after a space or comma. | |
411 | |
412 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory | |
413 of user "user". Example: > | |
414 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,. | |
415 | |
416 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can | |
417 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the | |
418 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'. | |
419 | |
12254 | 420 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set" |
421 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let". | |
422 | |
423 *$HOME-windows* | |
3224 | 424 On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then |
425 at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH. | |
12499 | 426 If $HOMEDRIVE is not set then $USERPROFILE is used. |
427 | |
428 This expanded value is not exported to the environment, this matters when | |
429 running an external command: > | |
430 :echo system('set | findstr ^HOME=') | |
431 and > | |
432 :echo luaeval('os.getenv("HOME")') | |
433 should echo nothing (an empty string) despite exists('$HOME') being true. | |
434 When setting $HOME to a non-empty string it will be exported to the | |
435 subprocesses. | |
3224 | 436 |
7 | 437 |
438 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on | |
439 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. | |
440 | |
441 *:fix* *:fixdel* | |
442 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD': | |
443 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~ | |
444 CTRL-? CTRL-H | |
445 not CTRL-? CTRL-? | |
446 | |
447 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi} | |
448 | |
449 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the | |
450 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in | |
451 your .vimrc: > | |
452 :fixdel | |
453 < This works no matter what the actual code for | |
454 backspace is. | |
455 | |
456 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can | |
457 use this: > | |
458 :if &term == "termname" | |
459 : set t_kb=^V<BS> | |
460 : fixdel | |
461 :endif | |
462 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key | |
10 | 463 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname" |
7 | 464 with your terminal name. |
465 | |
466 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not | |
467 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: > | |
468 :if &term == "termname" | |
469 : set t_kD=^V<Delete> | |
470 :endif | |
471 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key | |
472 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname" | |
473 with your terminal name. | |
474 | |
475 *Linux-backspace* | |
476 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key | |
477 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by | |
478 putting this line in your rc.local: > | |
479 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys | |
480 < | |
481 *NetBSD-backspace* | |
482 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce | |
483 the right code, try this: > | |
484 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace" | |
485 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: > | |
486 keysym 22 = BackSpace | |
487 < You need to restart for this to take effect. | |
488 | |
489 ============================================================================== | |
490 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting* | |
491 | |
492 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives | |
493 to set options automatically for one or more files: | |
494 | |
495 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See | |
496 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions, | |
497 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started. | |
498 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and | |
499 |:mksession|. | |
500 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed. | |
501 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and | |
502 many other things. See |autocommand|. | |
503 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a | |
504 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for | |
505 modelines. This is explained here. | |
506 | |
507 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520* | |
508 There are two forms of modelines. The first form: | |
5055 | 509 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options} |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
510 |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
511 [text] any text or empty |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
512 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) |
5055 | 513 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:" |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
514 [white] optional white space |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
515 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
516 or ':', where each part between ':' is the argument |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
517 for a ":set" command (can be empty) |
7 | 518 |
5055 | 519 Examples: |
782 | 520 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~ |
5055 | 521 vim: tw=77 ~ |
7 | 522 |
523 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi): | |
524 | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
525 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text] |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
526 |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
527 [text] any text or empty |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
528 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>) |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
529 {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:", "Vim:" or "ex:" |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
530 [white] optional white space |
5055 | 531 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space); When |
532 "Vim" is used it must be "set". | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
533 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
534 is the argument for a ":set" command |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
535 : a colon |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
536 [text] any text or empty |
7 | 537 |
5055 | 538 Examples: |
782 | 539 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ |
5055 | 540 /* Vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~ |
7 | 541 |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
542 The white space before {vi:|vim:|Vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
543 chance that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
544 "vi:" and "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
545 version 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this |
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
546 could be short for "example:"). |
7 | 547 |
548 *modeline-local* | |
549 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the | |
11 | 550 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global |
551 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and | |
552 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result | |
553 depends on which one was opened last. | |
7 | 554 |
23 | 555 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options |
556 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local | |
557 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer | |
558 in another window. But window-local options will be set. | |
559 | |
7 | 560 *modeline-version* |
561 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version | |
5024
7a2ffd685c0e
Update runtime files. Remove duplicate tags in help.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5008
diff
changeset
|
562 number can be specified where "vim:" or "Vim:" is used: |
7 | 563 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later |
564 vim<{vers}: version before {vers} | |
565 vim={vers}: version {vers} | |
566 vim>{vers}: version after {vers} | |
6647 | 567 {vers} is 700 for Vim 7.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor). |
568 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 7.0: | |
569 /* vim700: set foldmethod=marker */ ~ | |
570 To use a modeline for Vim after version 7.2: | |
571 /* vim>702: set cole=2: */ ~ | |
7 | 572 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":". |
573 | |
574 | |
575 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option. | |
576 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked. | |
577 | |
578 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line | |
782 | 579 like: |
580 /* vi:ts=4: */ ~ | |
581 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: | |
582 /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~ | |
7 | 583 |
584 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped. | |
585 | |
586 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The | |
782 | 587 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: |
588 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~ | |
7 | 589 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the |
590 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:". | |
591 | |
592 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody | |
1111 | 593 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines). And not all options |
594 can be set. For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the | |
1152 | 595 |sandbox| is effective. Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline |
1111 | 596 causes trouble. E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines |
597 are wrapped unexpectedly. So disable modelines before editing untrusted text. | |
598 The mail ftplugin does this, for example. | |
7 | 599 |
600 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could | |
601 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For | |
602 example: > | |
603 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif | |
604 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing | |
605 "VAR". | |
606 | |
607 ============================================================================== | |
608 3. Options summary *option-summary* | |
609 | |
610 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with | |
611 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used. | |
612 | |
613 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option" | |
614 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used. | |
615 | |
616 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is | |
617 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when | |
618 'compatible' is set. | |
619 | |
620 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that | |
10 | 621 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a |
7 | 622 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in |
623 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view | |
624 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain | |
625 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example | |
626 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C | |
627 program. | |
628 | |
629 global one option for all buffers and windows | |
630 local to window each window has its own copy of this option | |
631 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option | |
632 | |
633 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window | |
634 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the | |
635 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the | |
636 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for | |
637 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is | |
10 | 638 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer |
639 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not | |
7 | 640 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the |
641 buffer is created. | |
642 | |
519 | 643 Hidden options *hidden-options* |
644 | |
645 Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported | |
646 features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces | |
647 below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an | |
648 error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden | |
649 option though, it is not stored. | |
650 | |
651 To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: > | |
652 if exists('&foo') | |
653 This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really | |
654 supported use something like this: > | |
655 if exists('+foo') | |
656 < | |
7 | 657 *E355* |
658 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|. | |
659 | |
660 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph* | |
661 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise) | |
662 global | |
663 {not in Vi} | |
664 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
665 feature} | |
666 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The | |
667 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode | |
668 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_) | |
669 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26]. | |
670 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8. | |
671 See |rileft.txt|. | |
672 | |
673 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'* | |
674 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off) | |
675 global | |
676 {not in Vi} | |
677 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
678 feature} | |
679 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to | |
680 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get | |
681 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See | |
682 'revins'. | |
683 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
684 | |
685 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'* | |
686 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off) | |
687 global | |
688 {not in Vi} | |
689 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi| | |
690 feature} | |
233 | 691 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles |
7 | 692 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set. |
693 | |
233 | 694 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This |
7 | 695 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right |
696 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left | |
10 | 697 mode). See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 698 |
699 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'* | |
700 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single") | |
701 global | |
702 {not in Vi} | |
703 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
704 feature} | |
705 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding. | |
706 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class | |
707 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek | |
708 letters, Cyrillic letters). | |
709 | |
710 There are currently two possible values: | |
233 | 711 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is |
7 | 712 expected by most users. |
713 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters. | |
2492
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
714 *E834* *E835* |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
715 The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars' |
c945fdb34ce3
Disallow setting 'ambiwidth' to "double" when 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
716 contains a character that would be double width. |
7 | 717 |
718 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for | |
719 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in | |
720 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro, | |
721 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets, | |
233 | 722 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also |
7 | 723 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text |
233 | 724 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or |
7 | 725 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font |
726 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.), | |
727 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived | |
728 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has | |
729 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP | |
730 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode | |
731 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11). | |
732 | |
4229 | 733 Vim may set this option automatically at startup time when Vim is |
734 compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and if |t_u7| is set to the | |
12499 | 735 escape sequence to request cursor position report. The response can |
736 be found in |v:termu7resp|. | |
4229 | 737 |
7 | 738 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'* |
739 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off) | |
740 global | |
741 {not in Vi} | |
742 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled | |
743 on Mac OS X} | |
744 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X | |
745 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts, | |
746 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays. | |
747 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set | |
748 to its default (empty string). | |
11160 | 749 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 750 |
751 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'* | |
752 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off) | |
753 global | |
754 {not in Vi} | |
2152 | 755 {only available when compiled with it, use |
756 exists("+autochdir") to check} | |
438 | 757 When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you |
758 open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window. | |
759 It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened | |
760 or selected. | |
819 | 761 Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. |
7 | 762 |
763 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'* | |
764 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off) | |
765 local to window | |
766 {not in Vi} | |
767 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
768 feature} | |
769 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text. | |
770 Setting this option will: | |
771 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
772 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set. | |
773 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles | |
774 between typing English and Arabic key mapping. | |
775 - Set the 'delcombine' option | |
776 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text. | |
777 | |
778 Resetting this option will: | |
779 - Reset the 'rightleft' option. | |
780 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value). | |
781 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global | |
3557 | 782 option). |
11160 | 783 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 784 Also see |arabic.txt|. |
785 | |
786 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'* | |
787 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'* | |
788 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on) | |
789 global | |
790 {not in Vi} | |
791 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
792 feature} | |
793 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character | |
794 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language | |
3893 | 795 take effect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad |
7 | 796 one which encompasses: |
797 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location | |
798 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone). | |
799 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters | |
800 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
801 When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
802 form. |
7 | 803 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for |
804 further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
11160 | 805 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 806 |
807 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'* | |
808 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off) | |
809 local to buffer | |
810 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR> | |
811 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not | |
812 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type | |
1152 | 813 <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor |
814 to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included | |
815 in 'cpoptions'. | |
10 | 816 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you |
817 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first | |
818 line. | |
7 | 819 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in |
820 a different way. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
821 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
822 restored when 'paste' is reset. |
7 | 823 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing |
824 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the | |
825 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}. | |
826 | |
827 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'* | |
828 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off) | |
829 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
830 {not in Vi} | |
831 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and | |
832 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again. | |
14298
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
833 When the file has been deleted this is not done, so you have the text |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
834 from before it was deleted. When it appears again then it is read. |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
835 |timestamp| |
7 | 836 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to |
837 using the global value: > | |
838 :set autoread< | |
839 < | |
840 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'* | |
841 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off) | |
842 global | |
843 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each | |
844 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!, | |
864 | 845 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I, |
7 | 846 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file. |
847 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see | |
848 'autowriteall' for that. | |
14695 | 849 Some buffers will not be written, specifically when 'buftype' is |
14668 | 850 "nowrite", "nofile", "terminal" or "prompt". |
7 | 851 |
852 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'* | |
853 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off) | |
854 global | |
855 {not in Vi} | |
856 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit", | |
857 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window. | |
858 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has | |
859 been set. | |
860 | |
861 *'background'* *'bg'* | |
2826 | 862 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light", see below) |
7 | 863 global |
864 {not in Vi} | |
865 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a | |
866 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that | |
867 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal. | |
868 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used. | |
869 This will not always be correct. | |
870 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim | |
871 what the background color looks like. For changing the background | |
872 color, see |:hi-normal|. | |
873 | |
874 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for | |
10 | 875 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not |
1621 | 876 change. *g:colors_name* |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
877 When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set) |
7 | 878 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If |
879 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work. | |
880 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
881 be undone. First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed. |
7 | 882 |
883 When setting 'background' to the default value with: > | |
884 :set background& | |
885 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly, | |
886 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value. | |
887 | |
12499 | 888 When the |t_RB| option is set, Vim will use it to request the background |
11442 | 889 color from the terminal. If the returned RGB value is dark/light and |
890 'background' is not dark/light, 'background' will be set and the | |
891 screen is redrawn. This may have side effects, make t_BG empty in | |
12499 | 892 your .vimrc if you suspect this problem. The response to |t_RB| can |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
893 be found in |v:termrbgresp|. |
11442 | 894 |
7 | 895 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be |
896 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects | |
897 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to | |
898 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read | |
899 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background | |
900 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by | |
901 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value | |
902 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on"). | |
2826 | 903 |
904 For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark". | |
905 For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux", | |
906 "screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark | |
907 background. Otherwise the default is "light". | |
908 | |
12254 | 909 The |:terminal| command and the |term_start()| function use the |
910 'background' value to decide whether the terminal window will start | |
911 with a white or black background. | |
912 | |
7 | 913 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly |
914 depending on the terminal name. Example: > | |
915 :if &term == "pcterm" | |
916 : set background=dark | |
917 :endif | |
918 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups | |
919 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER | |
920 the setting of the 'background' option. | |
921 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file | |
922 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this | |
923 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be | |
924 done with ":syntax on". | |
925 | |
926 *'backspace'* *'bs'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
927 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "", set to "indent,eol,start" |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
928 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 929 global |
930 {not in Vi} | |
931 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert | |
932 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows | |
933 a way to backspace over something: | |
934 value effect ~ | |
935 indent allow backspacing over autoindent | |
936 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines) | |
937 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U | |
938 stop once at the start of insert. | |
939 | |
940 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used. | |
941 | |
942 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier: | |
943 value effect ~ | |
944 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible) | |
945 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol" | |
946 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start" | |
947 | |
948 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want. | |
949 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. | |
950 | |
951 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'* | |
952 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off) | |
953 global | |
954 {not in Vi} | |
955 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the | |
956 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the | |
957 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being | |
958 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is | |
959 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both | |
10 | 960 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the |
7 | 961 |backup-table| for more explanations. |
962 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. | |
963 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the | |
964 oldest version of a file. | |
965 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
966 | |
967 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'* | |
968 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto") | |
6243 | 969 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 970 {not in Vi} |
971 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's | |
972 done. This is a comma separated list of words. | |
973 | |
974 The main values are: | |
975 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one | |
976 "no" rename the file and write a new one | |
977 "auto" one of the previous, what works best | |
978 | |
979 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are: | |
980 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing | |
981 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing | |
982 | |
983 Making a copy and overwriting the original file: | |
984 - Takes extra time to copy the file. | |
985 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or | |
986 has a resource fork, all this is preserved. | |
987 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link, | |
988 not of the real file. | |
989 | |
990 Renaming the file and writing a new one: | |
991 + It's fast. | |
992 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new | |
993 file. | |
994 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link. | |
995 | |
996 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file | |
997 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and | |
1152 | 998 the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected, a |
999 copy will be made. | |
7 | 1000 |
1001 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in | |
1002 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they | |
1003 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing | |
1004 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to | |
1005 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be | |
1006 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or | |
1007 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not | |
1008 be propagated back to the original source. | |
1009 *crontab* | |
1010 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program | |
1011 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if | |
1012 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the | |
10 | 1013 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an |
7 | 1014 example. |
1015 | |
1016 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled | |
1017 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and | |
1018 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file | |
10 | 1019 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The |
7 | 1020 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this |
1021 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for | |
1022 others. | |
1023 | |
1024 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has | |
1025 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file | |
1026 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic) | |
1027 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't | |
1028 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly | |
1029 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but | |
1030 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will | |
1031 again not rename the file. | |
1032 | |
11160 | 1033 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
1034 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
1035 | |
7 | 1036 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'* |
1037 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
5555 | 1038 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:/tmp,c:/temp" |
7 | 1039 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/") |
1040 global | |
1041 {not in Vi} | |
1042 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas. | |
1043 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1044 where this is possible. The directory must exist, Vim will not |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1045 create it for you. |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
1046 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is |
7 | 1047 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this. |
1048 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory | |
1049 as the edited file. | |
33 | 1050 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 1051 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The |
1052 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
1053 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning). | |
1054 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part | |
1055 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
1056 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
1057 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
1058 - A directory name may end in an '/'. | |
14475
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
1059 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//", |
15033 | 1060 the backup file name will be built from the complete path to the |
1061 file with all path separators changed to percent '%' signs. This | |
1062 will ensure file name uniqueness in the backup directory. | |
14475
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
1063 On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\". However, When a |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
1064 separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
1065 include the comma in the file name. Therefore it is recommended to |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
1066 use '//', instead of '\\'. |
7 | 1067 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
1068 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
1069 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
1070 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
1071 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
1072 of the option is removed. | |
1073 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options. | |
1074 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: > | |
1075 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp | |
1076 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your | |
1077 home directory for this to work properly. | |
1078 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
1079 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
1080 uses another default. | |
1081 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1082 security reasons. | |
1083 | |
1084 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589* | |
1085 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_") | |
1086 global | |
1087 {not in Vi} | |
1088 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the | |
1089 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids | |
1090 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might | |
1091 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with | |
1092 ".bak" that you want to keep. | |
36 | 1093 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 1094 |
26 | 1095 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre |
1096 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to | |
1097 include a timestamp. > | |
1098 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~' | |
1099 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory. | |
1100 | |
7 | 1101 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'* |
13664
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1102 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" |
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1103 Unix: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*" |
f64c5e636c9f
patch 8.0.1704: 'backupskip' default doesn't work for Mac
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13482
diff
changeset
|
1104 Mac: "/private/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*") |
7 | 1105 global |
1106 {not in Vi} | |
1107 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
1108 feature} | |
1109 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the | |
1110 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both | |
1111 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used. | |
1112 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. | |
1113 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|. | |
1114 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the | |
233 | 1115 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix. |
1152 | 1116 |
3513 | 1117 WARNING: Not having a backup file means that when Vim fails to write |
1118 your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you | |
1119 lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only disable | |
1120 backups if you don't care about losing the file. | |
1121 | |
1152 | 1122 Note that environment variables are not expanded. If you want to use |
1123 $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: > | |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
1124 :let &backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*' |
1152 | 1125 |
1126 < Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a | |
557 | 1127 backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see |
1128 the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|. | |
7 | 1129 |
1130 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'* | |
1131 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600) | |
1132 global | |
1133 {not in Vi} | |
1134 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1135 feature} | |
1136 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|. | |
1137 | |
1138 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'* | |
1139 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off) | |
1140 global | |
1141 {not in Vi} | |
1142 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
189 | 1143 feature} |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1144 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the GUI. |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1145 |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1146 *'balloonevalterm'* *'bevalterm'* *'noballoonevalterm'* |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1147 *'nobevalterm'* |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1148 'balloonevalterm' 'bevalterm' boolean (default off) |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1149 global |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1150 {not in Vi} |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1151 {only available when compiled with the |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1152 |+balloon_eval_term| feature} |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
1153 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality for the terminal. |
7 | 1154 |
189 | 1155 *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'* |
1156 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "") | |
790 | 1157 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
189 | 1158 {not in Vi} |
1159 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval| | |
1160 feature} | |
782 | 1161 Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used |
1162 when 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used: | |
189 | 1163 |
1164 v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show | |
1165 v:beval_winnr number of the window | |
9227
ecb621205ed1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/82af8710bf8d1caeeceafb1370a052cb7d92f076
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9116
diff
changeset
|
1166 v:beval_winid ID of the window |
189 | 1167 v:beval_lnum line number |
1168 v:beval_col column number (byte index) | |
1169 v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer | |
1170 | |
1171 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! | |
1172 Example: > | |
1173 function! MyBalloonExpr() | |
435 | 1174 return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum . |
189 | 1175 \', column ' . v:beval_col . |
1176 \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) . | |
1177 \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"' | |
1178 endfunction | |
1179 set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr() | |
1180 set ballooneval | |
1181 < | |
11062 | 1182 Also see |balloon_show()|, can be used if the content of the balloon |
1183 is to be fetched asynchronously. | |
1184 | |
189 | 1185 NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text |
1186 character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty, | |
1187 Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans | |
1188 or Sun Workshop). | |
1189 | |
3682 | 1190 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
1191 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 1192 |
1193 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
1194 evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|. | |
1195 | |
446 | 1196 To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: > |
435 | 1197 if has("balloon_multiline") |
714 | 1198 < When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line. If the |
1199 expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item | |
1200 as a string and putting "\n" in between them. | |
11160 | 1201 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
714 | 1202 |
6949 | 1203 *'belloff'* *'bo'* |
1204 'belloff' 'bo' string (default "") | |
1205 global | |
1206 {not in Vi} | |
1207 Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung. It is a comma | |
1208 separated list of items. For each item that is present, the bell | |
1209 will be silenced. This is most useful to specify specific events in | |
1210 insert mode to be silenced. | |
1211 | |
1212 item meaning when present ~ | |
1213 all All events. | |
1214 backspace When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an | |
1215 error. | |
1216 cursor Fail to move around using the cursor keys or | |
1217 <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|. | |
1218 complete Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or | |
1219 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. | |
1220 copy Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or | |
1221 |i_CTRL-E|. | |
1222 ctrlg Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode. | |
1223 error Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line) | |
1224 (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|). | |
1225 esc hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|. | |
1226 ex In |Visual-mode|, hitting |Q| results in an error. | |
1227 hangul Error occurred when using hangul input. | |
1228 insertmode Pressing <Esc> in 'insertmode'. | |
1229 lang Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL. | |
1230 mess No output available for |g<|. | |
1231 showmatch Error occurred for 'showmatch' function. | |
1232 operator Empty region error |cpo-E|. | |
1233 register Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|. | |
1234 shell Bell from shell output |:!|. | |
1235 spell Error happened on spell suggest. | |
1236 wildmode More matches in |cmdline-completion| available | |
1237 (depends on the 'wildmode' setting). | |
1238 | |
11160 | 1239 This is most useful to fine tune when in Insert mode the bell should |
1240 be rung. For Normal mode and Ex commands, the bell is often rung to | |
6949 | 1241 indicate that an error occurred. It can be silenced by adding the |
1242 "error" keyword. | |
1243 | |
7 | 1244 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'* |
1245 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off) | |
1246 local to buffer | |
1247 {not in Vi} | |
1248 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also | |
1249 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few | |
1250 options will be changed (also when it already was on): | |
1251 'textwidth' will be set to 0 | |
1252 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0 | |
1253 'modeline' will be off | |
1254 'expandtab' will be off | |
1255 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the | |
1256 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL> | |
1257 separates lines). | |
1258 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the | |
1259 file is read without conversion. | |
1260 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is | |
1261 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g., | |
1262 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set | |
1263 'bin' again when the file has been loaded. | |
1264 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when | |
1265 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of | |
1266 saved option values. | |
1267 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument. | |
1268 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all | |
1269 files you edit. | |
1270 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if | |
1271 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to | |
1272 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See | |
1273 the 'endofline' option. | |
1274 | |
1275 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'* | |
1276 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on) | |
1277 global | |
1278 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
8246
f16bfe02cef1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f391327adbbffb11180cf6038a92af1ed144e907
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8182
diff
changeset
|
1279 This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. |
7 | 1280 |
1281 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'* | |
1282 'bomb' boolean (default off) | |
1283 local to buffer | |
1284 {not in Vi} | |
1285 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
1286 feature} | |
1287 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte | |
1288 Order Mark) is prepended to the file: | |
1289 - this option is on | |
1290 - the 'binary' option is off | |
1291 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big | |
1292 endian variants. | |
1293 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file. | |
1294 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it | |
1295 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
1296 appear halfway the resulting file. Gcc doesn't accept a BOM. |
7 | 1297 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a |
1298 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly. | |
1299 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you | |
1300 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM | |
1301 will be restored when writing the file. | |
1302 | |
1303 *'breakat'* *'brk'* | |
1304 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?") | |
1305 global | |
1306 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1307 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 1308 feature} |
1309 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line | |
500 | 1310 break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit |
1311 characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding. | |
7 | 1312 |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
1313 *'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'* |
6009 | 1314 'breakindent' 'bri' boolean (default off) |
1315 local to window | |
1316 {not in Vi} | |
1317 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
1318 feature} | |
1319 Every wrapped line will continue visually indented (same amount of | |
1320 space as the beginning of that line), thus preserving horizontal blocks | |
1321 of text. | |
11160 | 1322 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
6009 | 1323 |
1324 *'breakindentopt'* *'briopt'* | |
1325 'breakindentopt' 'briopt' string (default empty) | |
1326 local to window | |
1327 {not in Vi} | |
1328 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| | |
1329 feature} | |
1330 Settings for 'breakindent'. It can consist of the following optional | |
6026 | 1331 items and must be separated by a comma: |
6009 | 1332 min:{n} Minimum text width that will be kept after |
1333 applying 'breakindent', even if the resulting | |
1334 text should normally be narrower. This prevents | |
1335 text indented almost to the right window border | |
1336 occupying lot of vertical space when broken. | |
6026 | 1337 shift:{n} After applying 'breakindent', the wrapped line's |
1338 beginning will be shifted by the given number of | |
1339 characters. It permits dynamic French paragraph | |
6009 | 1340 indentation (negative) or emphasizing the line |
1341 continuation (positive). | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
1342 sbr Display the 'showbreak' value before applying the |
6009 | 1343 additional indent. |
1344 The default value for min is 20 and shift is 0. | |
1345 | |
7 | 1346 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'* |
29 | 1347 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last") |
7 | 1348 global |
1621 | 1349 {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and |
1350 Win32 GUI} | |
7 | 1351 Which directory to use for the file browser: |
1621 | 1352 last Use same directory as with last file browser, where a |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
1353 file was opened or saved. |
7 | 1354 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer. |
1355 current Use the current directory. | |
1356 {path} Use the specified directory | |
1357 | |
1358 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'* | |
1359 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "") | |
1360 local to buffer | |
1361 {not in Vi} | |
1362 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer | |
1363 displayed in a window: | |
1364 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option | |
1365 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden' | |
1366 is not set | |
1367 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using | |
1368 |:hide| | |
1369 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1370 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1371 |:bdelete| | |
1372 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when | |
1373 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using | |
1374 |:bwipeout| | |
1375 | |
82 | 1376 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer |
3224 | 1377 are lost without a warning. Also, these values may break autocommands |
1378 that switch between buffers temporarily. | |
7 | 1379 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify |
1380 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1381 | |
1382 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85* | |
1383 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on) | |
1384 local to buffer | |
1385 {not in Vi} | |
1386 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If | |
1387 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc. | |
1388 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember | |
1389 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer. | |
1390 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer". | |
1391 | |
1392 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382* | |
1393 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "") | |
1394 local to buffer | |
1395 {not in Vi} | |
1396 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer: | |
1397 <empty> normal buffer | |
1398 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be | |
1399 written | |
1400 nowrite buffer which will not be written | |
17 | 1401 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd |
13437 | 1402 autocommands. |
7 | 1403 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow| |
648 | 1404 or list of locations |:lwindow| |
7 | 1405 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this |
1406 manually) | |
11757
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
1407 terminal buffer for a |terminal| (you are not supposed to set |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
1408 this manually) |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1409 prompt buffer where only the last line can be edited, meant |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1410 to be used by a plugin, see |prompt-buffer| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
1411 {only when compiled with the |+channel| feature} |
7 | 1412 |
1413 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to | |
1414 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
1415 | |
1416 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects! | |
1417 | |
648 | 1418 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location |
1419 list. This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and | |
1420 you are not supposed to change it. | |
7 | 1421 |
1422 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar: | |
1423 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't | |
1424 work (":w filename" does work though). | |
1425 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|. | |
1426 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for | |
1427 example when you quit Vim. | |
1428 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory | |
1429 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap | |
1430 file). | |
1431 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a | |
1432 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd| | |
1433 command. | |
6647 | 1434 both: When using ":e bufname" and already editing "bufname" |
1435 the buffer is made empty and autocommands are | |
1436 triggered as usual for |:edit|. | |
17 | 1437 *E676* |
1438 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like | |
1439 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and | |
1440 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned | |
1441 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|, | |
1442 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands. | |
7 | 1443 |
1444 *'casemap'* *'cmp'* | |
1445 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii") | |
1446 global | |
1447 {not in Vi} | |
804 | 1448 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
1449 feature} | |
7 | 1450 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain |
1451 these words, separated by a comma: | |
1452 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current | |
1453 locale does not change the case mapping. This only | |
493 | 1454 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding, |
1455 "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is | |
1456 omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library | |
1457 functions are used when available. | |
7 | 1458 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US |
1459 case mapping, the current locale is not effective. | |
1460 This probably only matters for Turkish. | |
1461 | |
1462 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346* | |
1463 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,") | |
1464 global | |
1465 {not in Vi} | |
1466 {not available when compiled without the | |
1467 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
1468 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1469 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched | |
1668 | 1470 for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./" |
1471 or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then. | |
7 | 1472 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as |
1473 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|. | |
1474 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look | |
1475 in the current directory first. | |
1476 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include | |
1477 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to | |
1478 override it: > | |
1479 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g') | |
1480 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1481 security reasons. | |
1482 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names). | |
1483 | |
1484 *'cedit'* | |
1485 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F) | |
1486 global | |
1487 {not in Vi} | |
1488 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1489 feature} | |
1490 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window. | |
1491 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off. | |
1492 Only non-printable keys are allowed. | |
1493 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to | |
1494 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: > | |
9407
619a98a67f67
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e18dbe865d190e74fb5d43ac8bc6ac22507d0223
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9344
diff
changeset
|
1495 :exe "set cedit=\<C-Y>" |
619a98a67f67
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e18dbe865d190e74fb5d43ac8bc6ac22507d0223
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9344
diff
changeset
|
1496 :exe "set cedit=\<Esc>" |
7 | 1497 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character. |
1498 See |cmdwin|. | |
11160 | 1499 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
1500 is reset. | |
7 | 1501 |
1502 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513* | |
1503 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "") | |
1504 global | |
1505 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1506 and |+eval| features} |
7 | 1507 {not in Vi} |
1508 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is | |
1509 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a | |
1510 different encoding from what is desired. | |
1511 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is | |
1512 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is | |
1513 preferred, because it is much faster. | |
1514 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no | |
1515 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first. | |
1516 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success, | |
1517 non-zero for failure. | |
1518 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'. | |
1519 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are | |
1520 used. | |
1521 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8" | |
1522 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this. | |
1523 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c' | |
1524 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion. | |
1525 Example: > | |
1526 set charconvert=CharConvert() | |
1527 fun CharConvert() | |
1528 system("recode " | |
1529 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to | |
1530 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out) | |
1531 return v:shell_error | |
1532 endfun | |
1533 < The related Vim variables are: | |
1534 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding | |
1535 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding | |
1536 v:fname_in name of the input file | |
1537 v:fname_out name of the output file | |
1538 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same. | |
1539 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different | |
1540 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4. | |
1541 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want | |
1542 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care | |
1543 of this. | |
1544 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
1545 security reasons. | |
1546 | |
1547 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'* | |
1548 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off) | |
1549 local to buffer | |
1550 {not in Vi} | |
1551 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1552 feature} | |
1621 | 1553 Enables automatic C program indenting. See 'cinkeys' to set the keys |
7 | 1554 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your |
1555 preferred indent style. | |
1556 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'. | |
1557 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty, | |
1558 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an | |
1559 external program. | |
1560 See |C-indenting|. | |
1561 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent' | |
1562 option or 'indentexpr'. | |
1563 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
1564 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
1565 | |
1566 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'* | |
1567 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
1568 local to buffer | |
1569 {not in Vi} | |
1570 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1571 feature} | |
1572 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
1573 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is | |
1574 empty. | |
1575 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|. | |
1576 See |C-indenting|. | |
1577 | |
1578 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'* | |
1579 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "") | |
1580 local to buffer | |
1581 {not in Vi} | |
1582 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
1583 feature} | |
1584 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C | |
1585 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and | |
1586 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general. | |
1587 | |
1588 | |
1589 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'* | |
1590 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch") | |
1591 local to buffer | |
1592 {not in Vi} | |
1593 {not available when compiled without both the | |
1594 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features} | |
1595 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when | |
1596 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at | |
1597 an appropriate place (inside {}). | |
1598 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't | |
1599 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase: | |
1600 "if,If,IF". | |
1601 | |
1602 *'clipboard'* *'cb'* | |
1603 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux" | |
1604 for X-windows, "" otherwise) | |
1605 global | |
1606 {not in Vi} | |
1607 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard| | |
1608 feature is included} | |
1609 This option is a list of comma separated names. | |
1610 These names are recognized: | |
1611 | |
3674 | 1612 *clipboard-unnamed* |
7 | 1613 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*' |
1614 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which | |
1615 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a | |
1616 register is explicitly specified, it will always be | |
1617 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard' | |
1618 or not. The clipboard register can always be | |
1619 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see | |
1620 |gui-clipboard|. | |
1621 | |
3682 | 1622 *clipboard-unnamedplus* |
4119 | 1623 unnamedplus A variant of the "unnamed" flag which uses the |
1624 clipboard register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of | |
1625 register '*' for all yank, delete, change and put | |
1626 operations which would normally go to the unnamed | |
1627 register. When "unnamed" is also included to the | |
1628 option, yank operations (but not delete, change or | |
1629 put) will additionally copy the text into register | |
1630 '*'. | |
2662 | 1631 Only available with the |+X11| feature. |
2654 | 1632 Availability can be checked with: > |
1633 if has('unnamedplus') | |
1634 < | |
3682 | 1635 *clipboard-autoselect* |
7 | 1636 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present, |
1637 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual | |
1638 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the | |
1639 windowing system's global selection or put the | |
1640 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection | |
14999 | 1641 register "*. See |'go-a'| and |quotestar| for details. |
1642 When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in 'guioptions' | |
1643 is used, when the GUI is not active, this "autoselect" | |
1644 flag is used. | |
7 | 1645 Also applies to the modeless selection. |
1646 | |
3674 | 1647 *clipboard-autoselectplus* |
1648 autoselectplus Like "autoselect" but using the + register instead of | |
1649 the * register. Compare to the 'P' flag in | |
1650 'guioptions'. | |
1651 | |
1652 *clipboard-autoselectml* | |
7 | 1653 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection |
1654 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
1655 | |
3674 | 1656 *clipboard-html* |
1904 | 1657 html When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when |
1658 pasting. When putting text on the clipboard, mark it | |
1659 as HTML. This works to copy rendered HTML from | |
1660 Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML | |
1661 in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox. | |
2240
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1662 You probably want to add this only temporarily, |
6b4879aea261
Add test for gettabvar() and settabvar().
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2220
diff
changeset
|
1663 possibly use BufEnter autocommands. |
1904 | 1664 Only supported for GTK version 2 and later. |
1665 Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature. | |
1666 | |
3674 | 1667 *clipboard-exclude* |
7 | 1668 exclude:{pattern} |
1669 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of | |
1670 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no | |
1671 connection will be made to the X server. This is | |
1672 useful in this situation: | |
1673 - Running Vim in a console. | |
1674 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another | |
1675 display. | |
1676 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the | |
1677 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator. | |
1678 To never connect to the X server use: > | |
1679 exclude:.* | |
1680 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument. | |
1681 Note that when there is no connection to the X server | |
1682 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard | |
1683 cannot be accessed. | |
1684 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is | |
1685 interpreted as if 'magic' was on. | |
1686 The rest of the option value will be used for | |
1687 {pattern}, this must be the last entry. | |
1688 | |
1689 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'* | |
1690 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1) | |
1691 global | |
1692 {not in Vi} | |
1693 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding | |
1694 |hit-enter| prompts. | |
824 | 1695 The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab |
1696 page can have a different value. | |
7 | 1697 |
1698 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'* | |
1699 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7) | |
1700 global | |
1701 {not in Vi} | |
1702 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| | |
1703 feature} | |
1704 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin| | |
1705 | |
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1706 *'colorcolumn'* *'cc'* |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1707 'colorcolumn' 'cc' string (default "") |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1708 local to window |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1709 {not in Vi} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1710 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1711 feature} |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1712 'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1713 highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|. Useful to align |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1714 text. Will make screen redrawing slower. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1715 The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1716 '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. > |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1717 |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1718 :set cc=+1 " highlight column after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1719 :set cc=+1,+2,+3 " highlight three columns after 'textwidth' |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1720 :hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1721 < |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1722 When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1723 A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted. |
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2607
diff
changeset
|
1724 |
7 | 1725 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594* |
1726 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width) | |
1727 global | |
1728 {not in Vi} | |
1729 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal | |
161 | 1730 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see |
1731 |posix-screen-size|. | |
7 | 1732 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
1733 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
1734 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
1735 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical | |
1152 | 1736 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up. For |
1737 the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to | |
1738 what fits on the screen. You can use this command to get the widest | |
1739 window possible: > | |
1740 :set columns=9999 | |
1741 < Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000. | |
7 | 1742 |
1743 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525* | |
1744 'comments' 'com' string (default | |
1745 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-") | |
1746 local to buffer | |
1747 {not in Vi} | |
1748 {not available when compiled without the |+comments| | |
1749 feature} | |
1750 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See | |
1751 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to | |
1752 insert a space. | |
1753 | |
1754 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537* | |
1755 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/") | |
1756 local to buffer | |
1757 {not in Vi} | |
1758 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
1759 feature} | |
1760 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the | |
1761 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see | |
1762 |fold-marker|. | |
1763 | |
1764 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'* | |
819 | 1765 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
1766 file is found, reset in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 1767 global |
1768 {not in Vi} | |
1769 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or | |
1770 make Vim behave in a more useful way. | |
11062 | 1771 |
7 | 1772 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset, |
11062 | 1773 other options are also changed as a side effect. |
1774 NOTE: Setting or resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected | |
1775 effects: Mappings are interpreted in another way, undo behaves | |
1776 differently, etc. If you set this option in your vimrc file, you | |
1777 should probably put it at the very start. | |
1778 | |
7 | 1779 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the |
1780 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim | |
1781 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible' | |
1782 option. | |
819 | 1783 When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up, |
378 | 1784 this option is switched off, and all options that have not been |
1785 modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means | |
819 | 1786 that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim |
378 | 1787 defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't |
1152 | 1788 happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given |
1789 with the |-u| argument). Also see |compatible-default| and | |
1790 |posix-compliance|. | |
7 | 1791 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with |
1792 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|. | |
11062 | 1793 See 'cpoptions' for more fine tuning of Vi compatibility. |
1794 | |
1795 When this option is set, numerous other options are set to make Vim as | |
1796 Vi-compatible as possible. When this option is unset, various options | |
1797 are set to make Vim more useful. The table below lists all the | |
1798 options affected. | |
1799 The {?} column indicates when the options are affected: | |
1800 + Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when | |
1801 'compatible' is set. | |
1802 & Means that the option is set to the value given in {set value} when | |
1803 'compatible' is set AND is set to its Vim default value when | |
1804 'compatible' is unset. | |
1805 - Means the option is NOT changed when setting 'compatible' but IS | |
1806 set to its Vim default when 'compatible' is unset. | |
1807 The {effect} column summarises the change when 'compatible' is set. | |
1808 | |
11160 | 1809 option ? set value effect ~ |
11062 | 1810 |
1811 'allowrevins' + off no CTRL-_ command | |
1812 'antialias' + off don't use antialiased fonts | |
1813 'arabic' + off reset arabic-related options | |
1814 'arabicshape' + on correct character shapes | |
1815 'backspace' + "" normal backspace | |
1816 'backup' + off no backup file | |
1817 'backupcopy' & Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy | |
1818 else: "auto" copy or rename backup file | |
1819 'balloonexpr' + "" text to show in evaluation balloon | |
1820 'breakindent' + off don't indent when wrapping lines | |
1821 'cedit' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1822 'cindent' + off no C code indentation | |
1823 'compatible' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1824 'copyindent' + off don't copy indent structure | |
1825 'cpoptions' & (all flags) Vi-compatible flags | |
1826 'cscopepathcomp'+ 0 don't show directories in tags list | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
1827 'cscoperelative'+ off don't use basename of path as prefix |
11062 | 1828 'cscopetag' + off don't use cscope for ":tag" |
11160 | 1829 'cscopetagorder'+ 0 see |cscopetagorder| |
11062 | 1830 'cscopeverbose' + off see |cscopeverbose| |
1831 'delcombine' + off unicode: delete whole char combination | |
1832 'digraph' + off no digraphs | |
1833 'esckeys' & off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode | |
1834 'expandtab' + off tabs not expanded to spaces | |
1835 'fileformats' & "" no automatic file format detection, | |
7 | 1836 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2 |
11062 | 1837 'formatexpr' + "" use 'formatprg' for auto-formatting |
1838 'formatoptions' & "vt" Vi compatible formatting | |
1839 'gdefault' + off no default 'g' flag for ":s" | |
1840 'history' & 0 no commandline history | |
1841 'hkmap' + off no Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1842 'hkmapp' + off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping | |
1843 'hlsearch' + off no highlighting of search matches | |
1844 'incsearch' + off no incremental searching | |
1845 'indentexpr' + "" no indenting by expression | |
1846 'insertmode' + off do not start in Insert mode | |
1847 'iskeyword' & "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric | |
7 | 1848 characters and '_' |
11062 | 1849 'joinspaces' + on insert 2 spaces after period |
1850 'modeline' & off no modelines | |
1851 'more' & off no pauses in listings | |
1852 'mzquantum' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1853 'numberwidth' & 8 min number of columns for line number | |
1854 'preserveindent'+ off don't preserve current indent structure | |
1855 when changing it | |
1856 'revins' + off no reverse insert | |
1857 'ruler' + off no ruler | |
1858 'scrolljump' + 1 no jump scroll | |
1859 'scrolloff' + 0 no scroll offset | |
1860 'shelltemp' - {unchanged} {set vim default only on resetting 'cp'} | |
1861 'shiftround' + off indent not rounded to shiftwidth | |
1862 'shortmess' & "" no shortening of messages | |
1863 'showcmd' & off command characters not shown | |
1864 'showmode' & off current mode not shown | |
1865 'sidescrolloff' + 0 cursor moves to edge of screen in scroll | |
1866 'smartcase' + off no automatic ignore case switch | |
1867 'smartindent' + off no smart indentation | |
1868 'smarttab' + off no smart tab size | |
1869 'softtabstop' + 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions | |
1870 'startofline' + on goto startofline with some commands | |
1871 'tagcase' & "followic" 'ignorecase' when searching tags file | |
1872 'tagrelative' & off tag file names are not relative | |
1873 'termguicolors' + off don't use highlight-(guifg|guibg) | |
1874 'textauto' & off no automatic textmode detection | |
1875 'textwidth' + 0 no automatic line wrap | |
1876 'tildeop' + off tilde is not an operator | |
1877 'ttimeout' + off no terminal timeout | |
1878 'undofile' + off don't use an undo file | |
11160 | 1879 'viminfo' - {unchanged} {set Vim default only on resetting 'cp'} |
11062 | 1880 'virtualedit' + "" cursor can only be placed on characters |
1881 'whichwrap' & "" left-right movements don't wrap | |
1882 'wildchar' & CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab> | |
7 | 1883 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion |
11062 | 1884 'writebackup' + on or off depends on the |+writebackup| feature |
7 | 1885 |
1886 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535* | |
1887 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i") | |
1888 local to buffer | |
1889 {not in Vi} | |
1890 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works | |
1891 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line | |
1892 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion | |
1893 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags: | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
1894 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored) |
7 | 1895 w scan buffers from other windows |
1896 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1897 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list | |
1898 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list | |
1899 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option | |
703 | 1900 kspell use the currently active spell checking |spell| |
7 | 1901 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given, |
1902 patterns are valid too. For example: > | |
1903 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish | |
1904 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option | |
1905 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns | |
1906 are valid too. | |
1907 i scan current and included files | |
1908 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro | |
1909 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D| | |
1910 ] tag completion | |
1911 t same as "]" | |
1912 | |
1913 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are | |
1914 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files | |
1915 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for | |
1916 whole-line completion. | |
1917 | |
1918 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan: | |
1919 1. the current buffer | |
1920 2. buffers in other windows | |
1921 3. other loaded buffers | |
1922 4. unloaded buffers | |
1923 5. tags | |
1924 6. included files | |
1925 | |
1926 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'- | |
233 | 1927 based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns |
1928 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions). | |
7 | 1929 |
12 | 1930 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'* |
1931 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty) | |
1932 local to buffer | |
1933 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1934 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
1935 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 1936 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion |
1937 with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U| | |
648 | 1938 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
1939 invoked and what it should return. | |
2642 | 1940 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
1941 security reasons. | |
14 | 1942 |
540 | 1943 *'completeopt'* *'cot'* |
730 | 1944 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu,preview") |
540 | 1945 global |
766 | 1946 {not available when compiled without the |
1947 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
540 | 1948 {not in Vi} |
665 | 1949 A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion |
1950 |ins-completion|. The supported values are: | |
540 | 1951 |
1952 menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The | |
1953 menu is only shown when there is more than one match and | |
1954 sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu| | |
1955 | |
707 | 1956 menuone Use the popup menu also when there is only one match. |
856 | 1957 Useful when there is additional information about the |
707 | 1958 match, e.g., what file it comes from. |
1959 | |
836 | 1960 longest Only insert the longest common text of the matches. If |
1961 the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more | |
1962 characters. Whether case is ignored depends on the kind | |
1963 of completion. For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is | |
1964 used. | |
665 | 1965 |
730 | 1966 preview Show extra information about the currently selected |
1152 | 1967 completion in the preview window. Only works in |
1968 combination with "menu" or "menuone". | |
1969 | |
6911 | 1970 noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects |
1971 a match from the menu. Only works in combination with | |
1972 "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present. | |
1973 | |
1974 noselect Do not select a match in the menu, force the user to | |
1975 select one from the menu. Only works in combination with | |
1976 "menu" or "menuone". | |
1977 | |
730 | 1978 |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1979 *'concealcursor'* *'cocu'* |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1980 'concealcursor' 'cocu' string (default: "") |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1981 local to window |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1982 {not in Vi} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1983 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1984 feature} |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1985 Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1986 When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1987 other lines. |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1988 n Normal mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1989 v Visual mode |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1990 i Insert mode |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1991 c Command line editing, for 'incsearch' |
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1992 |
2400
e6f1424dd66a
Let 'v' flag in 'concealcursor' apply to all lines in the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2394
diff
changeset
|
1993 'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor. |
2382
3a5ededa240a
Add the 'c' flag to 'concealcursor'.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2380
diff
changeset
|
1994 A useful value is "nc". This is used in help files. So long as you |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1995 are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1996 or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
1997 you can see what you are doing. |
2380
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1998 Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's |
b47748aa3236
Don't conceal text in lines inside the Visual area.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2378
diff
changeset
|
1999 displayed. E.g., when moving vertically it may change column. |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2000 |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2001 |
14864 | 2002 *'conceallevel'* *'cole'* |
2003 'conceallevel' 'cole' number (default 0) | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2004 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2005 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2006 {not available when compiled without the |+conceal| |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2007 feature} |
2340
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2008 Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal| |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2009 is shown: |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2010 |
99c1eba60b2d
Make automatic prototype generation work with more interfaces.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
2011 Value Effect ~ |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2012 0 Text is shown normally |
2426 | 2013 1 Each block of concealed text is replaced with one |
2014 character. If the syntax item does not have a custom | |
2015 replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the | |
2016 character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a | |
2017 space). | |
2018 It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group. | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2019 2 Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2020 custom replacement character defined (see |
2426 | 2021 |:syn-cchar|). |
2349
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2022 3 Concealed text is completely hidden. |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2023 |
586a459f3980
Never hide text for conceal in cursor line. Do hide when there is
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2348
diff
changeset
|
2024 Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can |
2378
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2025 edit and copy the text. This can be changed with the 'concealcursor' |
85b7dc8da5eb
Add the 'concealcursor' option to decide when the cursor line is to be
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2365
diff
changeset
|
2026 option. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2027 |
7 | 2028 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'* |
2029 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off) | |
2030 global | |
2031 {not in Vi} | |
2032 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally | |
2033 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e", | |
2034 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current | |
2035 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer. | |
2036 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one | |
2037 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm| | |
2038 command. | |
2039 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. | |
2040 | |
2041 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'* | |
2042 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off) | |
2043 global | |
2044 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS} | |
8246
f16bfe02cef1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f391327adbbffb11180cf6038a92af1ed144e907
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8182
diff
changeset
|
2045 This was for MS-DOS and is no longer supported. |
7 | 2046 |
2047 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'* | |
2048 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off) | |
2049 local to buffer | |
2050 {not in Vi} | |
2051 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a | |
2052 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of | |
2053 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled, | |
2054 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the | |
2055 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the | |
1621 | 2056 existing line. 'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab |
2057 remains a Tab. If the new indent is greater than on the existing | |
7 | 2058 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner. |
11160 | 2059 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2060 Also see 'preserveindent'. |
2061 | |
8148
f5da459c5698
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e0fa3742ead676a3074a10edadbc955e1a89153d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8061
diff
changeset
|
2062 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'* *cpo* |
7 | 2063 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs", |
2064 Vi default: all flags) | |
2065 global | |
2066 {not in Vi} | |
2067 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present | |
5340 | 2068 this indicates Vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where |
2069 not being Vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred. | |
7 | 2070 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options". |
2071 Commas can be added for readability. | |
2072 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
2073 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
2074 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2075 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
164 | 2076 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when |
2077 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2078 variable exists |posix|. This means Vim tries to behave like the |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2079 POSIX specification. |
7 | 2080 |
2081 contains behavior ~ | |
2082 *cpo-a* | |
2083 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
2084 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
2085 current window. | |
2086 *cpo-A* | |
2087 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
2088 argument will set the alternate file name for the | |
2089 current window. | |
2090 *cpo-b* | |
2091 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of | |
2092 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping, | |
2093 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next | |
2094 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to | |
2095 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all | |
2096 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands. | |
2097 See also |map_bar|. | |
2098 *cpo-B* | |
2099 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings, | |
14372 | 2100 abbreviations, user commands and the "to" part of the |
2101 menu commands. Remove this flag to be able to use a | |
2102 backslash like a CTRL-V. For example, the command | |
2103 ":map X \<Esc>" results in X being mapped to: | |
7 | 2104 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>) |
2105 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters) | |
2106 ('<' excluded in both cases) | |
2107 *cpo-c* | |
2108 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the | |
2109 cursor position, but not further than the start of the | |
2110 next line. When not present searching continues | |
2111 one character from the cursor position. With 'c' | |
2112 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating | |
2113 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches. | |
2114 *cpo-C* | |
2115 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a | |
2116 backslash. See |line-continuation|. | |
2117 *cpo-d* | |
2118 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use | |
2119 the tags file relative to the current file, but the | |
2120 tags file in the current directory. | |
2121 *cpo-D* | |
2122 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode | |
2123 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and | |
2124 |t|. | |
2125 *cpo-e* | |
2126 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a | |
2127 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not | |
2128 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register | |
2129 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a | |
2130 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line | |
2131 and can be edited before hitting <CR>. | |
2132 *cpo-E* | |
2133 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or | |
2134 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when | |
13818
28ac7914b2b6
Update runtime files and translations
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13742
diff
changeset
|
2135 at least one character is to be operated on. Example: |
7 | 2136 This makes "y0" fail in the first column. |
2137 *cpo-f* | |
2138 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name | |
2139 argument will set the file name for the current buffer, | |
2140 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet. | |
2141 *cpo-F* | |
2142 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name | |
2143 argument will set the file name for the current | |
2144 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name | |
590 | 2145 yet. Also see |cpo-P|. |
7 | 2146 *cpo-g* |
2147 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument. | |
164 | 2148 *cpo-H* |
2149 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert | |
2150 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after | |
2151 the last blank. | |
7 | 2152 *cpo-i* |
2153 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will | |
2154 leave it modified. | |
10 | 2155 *cpo-I* |
2156 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting | |
2157 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent. | |
7 | 2158 *cpo-j* |
2159 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.', | |
2160 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'. | |
2161 *cpo-J* | |
2162 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after | |
233 | 2163 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as |
7 | 2164 white space. |
2165 *cpo-k* | |
2166 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in | |
2167 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu | |
2168 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[ | |
2169 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X | |
2170 being mapped to: | |
2171 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters) | |
2172 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code) | |
2173 Also see the '<' flag below. | |
2174 *cpo-K* | |
2175 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is | |
2176 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when | |
2177 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It | |
2178 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>. | |
2179 *cpo-l* | |
2180 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
168 | 2181 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special. |
2182 See |/[]| | |
7 | 2183 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't' |
2184 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab> | |
168 | 2185 Also see |cpo-\|. |
7 | 2186 *cpo-L* |
2187 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin', | |
2188 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode | |
2189 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of | |
2190 the normal behavior of a <Tab>. | |
2191 *cpo-m* | |
2192 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a | |
2193 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half | |
2194 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'| | |
2195 *cpo-M* | |
2196 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into | |
2197 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer | |
2198 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores | |
2199 backslashes, which is Vi compatible. | |
2200 *cpo-n* | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2201 n When included, the column used for 'number' and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2202 'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2203 lines. |
7 | 2204 *cpo-o* |
2205 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for | |
2206 next search. | |
2207 *cpo-O* | |
2208 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even | |
2209 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a | |
2210 protection against a file unexpectedly created by | |
2211 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this. | |
2212 *cpo-p* | |
2213 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a | |
2214 slightly better algorithm is used. | |
590 | 2215 *cpo-P* |
2216 P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a | |
2217 file will set the file name for the current buffer, if | |
2218 the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and | |
2219 the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|. | |
164 | 2220 *cpo-q* |
2221 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the | |
2222 position where it would be when joining two lines. | |
7 | 2223 *cpo-r* |
2224 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search | |
2225 command, instead of the actually used search string. | |
2226 *cpo-R* | |
2227 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag | |
2228 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used. | |
2229 *cpo-s* | |
2230 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the | |
2231 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0. | |
10 | 2232 And it is the default. If not present the options are |
7 | 2233 set when the buffer is created. |
2234 *cpo-S* | |
2235 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer | |
2236 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and | |
2237 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting. | |
2238 The options are set to the values in the current | |
2239 buffer. When you change an option and go to another | |
2240 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the | |
2241 buffer options global to all buffers. | |
2242 | |
2243 's' 'S' copy buffer options | |
2244 no no when buffer created | |
2245 yes no when buffer first entered (default) | |
2246 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.) | |
2247 *cpo-t* | |
2248 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for | |
2249 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in | |
2250 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the | |
2251 last used search pattern. | |
2252 *cpo-u* | |
10 | 2253 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|. |
7 | 2254 *cpo-v* |
2255 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in | |
2256 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are | |
2257 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the | |
2258 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced | |
2259 characters. | |
2260 *cpo-w* | |
2261 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one | |
2262 character and not all blanks until the start of the | |
2263 next word. | |
2264 *cpo-W* | |
2265 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!" | |
2266 overwrites a readonly file, if possible. | |
2267 *cpo-x* | |
2268 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line. | |
2269 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line, | |
2270 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>| | |
164 | 2271 *cpo-X* |
2272 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is | |
2273 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "." | |
2274 and a count. | |
7 | 2275 *cpo-y* |
2276 y A yank command can be redone with ".". | |
164 | 2277 *cpo-Z* |
2278 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set, | |
2279 don't reset 'readonly'. | |
7 | 2280 *cpo-!* |
2281 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used | |
2282 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last | |
2283 used -filter- command is used. | |
2284 *cpo-$* | |
2285 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the | |
2286 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text. | |
2287 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the | |
2288 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any | |
2289 command that moves the cursor from the insertion | |
2290 point. | |
2291 *cpo-%* | |
2292 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command. | |
2293 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc. | |
2294 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/". | |
2295 Parens inside single and double quotes are also | |
2296 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to | |
2297 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like | |
2298 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not | |
2299 match the last one. When this flag is not included, | |
2300 parens inside single and double quotes are treated | |
2301 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes, | |
2302 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a | |
2303 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if | |
10 | 2304 there is one). This works very well for C programs. |
36 | 2305 This flag is also used for other features, such as |
2306 C-indenting. | |
161 | 2307 *cpo--* |
2308 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when | |
632 | 2309 it would go above the first line or below the last |
2310 line. Without it the cursor moves to the first or | |
2311 last line, unless it already was in that line. | |
161 | 2312 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j", |
632 | 2313 CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234". |
39 | 2314 *cpo-+* |
2315 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the | |
2316 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer | |
2317 itself may still be different from its file. | |
856 | 2318 *cpo-star* |
7 | 2319 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included, |
2320 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area. | |
2321 *cpo-<* | |
2322 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>| | |
2323 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of | |
10 | 2324 menu commands. For example, the command |
7 | 2325 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to: |
2326 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters) | |
2327 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>) | |
2328 Also see the 'k' flag above. | |
164 | 2329 *cpo->* |
2330 > When appending to a register, put a line break before | |
2331 the appended text. | |
2925 | 2332 *cpo-;* |
2333 ; When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search | |
2334 and the cursor is right in front of the searched | |
2335 character, the cursor won't move. When not included, | |
2336 the cursor would skip over it and jump to the | |
3557 | 2337 following occurrence. |
164 | 2338 |
2339 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except | |
2340 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix| | |
2341 | |
2342 contains behavior ~ | |
856 | 2343 *cpo-#* |
164 | 2344 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect. |
168 | 2345 *cpo-&* |
2346 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when | |
2347 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded. | |
2348 This flag is tested when exiting. | |
2349 *cpo-\* | |
2350 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken | |
2351 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]| | |
488 | 2352 '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-' |
2353 '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-' | |
2354 Also see |cpo-l|. | |
168 | 2355 *cpo-/* |
2356 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s| | |
2357 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%| | |
164 | 2358 *cpo-{* |
2359 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character | |
2360 at the start of a line. | |
168 | 2361 *cpo-.* |
2362 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current | |
2363 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't | |
2364 need this, since it remembers the full path of an | |
2365 opened file. | |
164 | 2366 *cpo-bar* |
2367 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment | |
2368 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained | |
2369 with system specific functions. | |
2370 | |
7 | 2371 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2372 *'cryptmethod'* *'cm'* |
6336 | 2373 'cryptmethod' 'cm' string (default "zip") |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2374 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2375 {not in Vi} |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2376 Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file: |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2377 *pkzip* |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2378 zip PkZip compatible method. A weak kind of encryption. |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2379 Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older. |
2184
5028c4d6d825
Fixed encryption big/little endian test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2180
diff
changeset
|
2380 *blowfish* |
6122 | 2381 blowfish Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption but it has |
2382 an implementation flaw. Requires Vim 7.3 or later, | |
2383 files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older. This adds | |
2384 a "seed" to the file, every time you write the file | |
2385 the encrypted bytes will be different. | |
2386 *blowfish2* | |
2387 blowfish2 Blowfish method. Medium strong encryption. Requires | |
7876
93f747af7b58
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5e9b2fa9bb0e6061cf18457c173cd141a5dc9c92
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7687
diff
changeset
|
2388 Vim 7.4.401 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3 |
6122 | 2389 and older. This adds a "seed" to the file, every time |
2390 you write the file the encrypted bytes will be | |
2391 different. The whole undo file is encrypted, not just | |
2392 the pieces of text. | |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2393 |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
2394 You should use "blowfish2", also to re-encrypt older files. |
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
2395 |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2396 When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2397 to the detected method of the file being read. Thus if you write it |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2398 without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used. |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2399 Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2400 explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2401 modifications. Also see |:X|. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2402 |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2403 When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2404 the value "zip". When setting the local value to an empty string the |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2405 buffer will use the global value. |
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2406 |
2204
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2407 When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and |
c493d6bfde09
A few more changes for encryption. Add test that encrypted file can be read.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2184
diff
changeset
|
2408 the current version does not recognize it, you will get *E821* . |
2360
d8e4b27cef80
Change 'cryptmethod' from a number to a string option. Make it global-local.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
2409 You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2410 |
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
2411 |
7 | 2412 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'* |
2413 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0) | |
2414 global | |
2415 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2416 feature} | |
2417 {not in Vi} | |
2418 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags. | |
2419 See |cscopepathcomp|. | |
11160 | 2420 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2421 |
2422 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'* | |
2423 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope") | |
2424 global | |
2425 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2426 feature} | |
2427 {not in Vi} | |
2428 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|. | |
2429 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2430 security reasons. | |
2431 | |
2432 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'* | |
2433 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "") | |
2434 global | |
2435 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2436 or |+quickfix| features} | |
2437 {not in Vi} | |
2438 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results. | |
2439 See |cscopequickfix|. | |
2440 | |
4869 | 2441 *'cscoperelative'* *'csre'* *'nocscoperelative'* *'nocsre'* |
2873 | 2442 'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off) |
2443 global | |
2444 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2445 feature} | |
2446 {not in Vi} | |
2447 In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables | |
2448 to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix. | |
2449 See |cscoperelative|. | |
11160 | 2450 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2873 | 2451 |
7 | 2452 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'* |
2453 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off) | |
2454 global | |
2455 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2456 feature} | |
2457 {not in Vi} | |
2458 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|. | |
2459 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2460 | |
2461 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'* | |
2462 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0) | |
2463 global | |
2464 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2465 feature} | |
2466 {not in Vi} | |
2467 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See | |
2468 |cscopetagorder|. | |
2469 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
2470 | |
2471 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'* | |
2472 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'* | |
2473 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off) | |
2474 global | |
2475 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope| | |
2476 feature} | |
2477 {not in Vi} | |
2478 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|. | |
2479 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2480 | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2481 *'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'* |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2482 'cursorbind' 'crb' boolean (default off) |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2483 local to window |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2484 {not in Vi} |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2485 When this option is set, as the cursor in the current |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2486 window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2487 this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2488 column. This option is useful for viewing the |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2489 differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode, |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2490 inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
2491 taken into account. |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
2492 |
743 | 2493 |
2494 *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'* | |
2495 'cursorcolumn' 'cuc' boolean (default off) | |
2496 local to window | |
2497 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2498 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2499 feature} |
2500 Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn | |
2501 |hl-CursorColumn|. Useful to align text. Will make screen redrawing | |
2502 slower. | |
826 | 2503 If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use |
2504 these autocommands: > | |
2505 au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn | |
2506 au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn | |
2507 < | |
743 | 2508 |
2509 *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'* | |
2510 'cursorline' 'cul' boolean (default off) | |
2511 local to window | |
2512 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2513 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| |
743 | 2514 feature} |
2515 Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine | |
2516 |hl-CursorLine|. Useful to easily spot the cursor. Will make screen | |
2517 redrawing slower. | |
818 | 2518 When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it |
825 | 2519 easier to see the selected text. |
743 | 2520 |
2521 | |
7 | 2522 *'debug'* |
2523 'debug' string (default "") | |
2524 global | |
2525 {not in Vi} | |
839 | 2526 These values can be used: |
2527 msg Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2528 anyway. | |
2529 throw Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given | |
2530 anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|. | |
2531 beep A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be | |
2532 produced. | |
168 | 2533 The values can be combined, separated by a comma. |
839 | 2534 "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or |
2535 'indentexpr'. | |
7 | 2536 |
2537 *'define'* *'def'* | |
2538 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define") | |
2539 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2540 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 2541 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search |
7 | 2542 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the |
2543 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is | |
2544 used to recognize the defined name after the match: | |
2545 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char} | |
2546 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space | |
2547 or backslash. | |
2548 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be | |
2549 useful, to include const type declarations: > | |
2550 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\) | |
2551 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes! | |
2552 | |
2553 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'* | |
2554 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off) | |
2555 global | |
2556 {not in Vi} | |
2557 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2558 feature} | |
2559 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode | |
2560 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the | |
2561 default) the character along with its combining characters are | |
2562 deleted. | |
2563 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"! | |
2564 | |
2565 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one | |
2566 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want | |
2567 to remove only the combining ones. | |
11160 | 2568 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 2569 |
2570 *'dictionary'* *'dict'* | |
2571 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "") | |
2572 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2573 {not in Vi} | |
2574 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
2575 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should | |
2576 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several | |
2577 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is | |
2578 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes. | |
13950
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2579 |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2580 When this option is empty or an entry "spell" is present, and spell |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2581 checking is enabled, words in the word lists for the currently active |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2582 'spelllang' are used. See |spell|. |
741b1feeac9f
patch 8.0.1845: various comment updates needed, missing white space
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13818
diff
changeset
|
2583 |
10 | 2584 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 2585 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
2586 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
99 | 2587 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type. |
7 | 2588 Where to find a list of words? |
2589 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words". | |
2590 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory. | |
2591 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection. | |
2592 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2593 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2594 uses another default. | |
2595 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
2596 | |
2597 *'diff'* *'nodiff'* | |
2598 'diff' boolean (default off) | |
2599 local to window | |
2600 {not in Vi} | |
2601 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2602 feature} | |
2603 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences | |
10 | 2604 between files. See |vimdiff|. |
7 | 2605 |
2606 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'* | |
2607 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "") | |
2608 global | |
2609 {not in Vi} | |
2610 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2611 feature} | |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2612 Expression which is evaluated to obtain a diff file (either ed-style |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2613 or unified-style) from two versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|. |
7 | 2614 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
2615 security reasons. | |
2616 | |
2617 *'dip'* *'diffopt'* | |
14702
daf8afe6279b
patch 8.1.0363: internal diff isn't used by default as advertised
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14696
diff
changeset
|
2618 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "internal,filler") |
7 | 2619 global |
2620 {not in Vi} | |
2621 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
2622 feature} | |
10 | 2623 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items. |
7 | 2624 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma. |
2625 | |
2626 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text | |
2627 synchronized with a window that has inserted | |
2628 lines at the same position. Mostly useful | |
2629 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind' | |
2630 is set. | |
2631 | |
2632 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change | |
2633 and a fold that contains unchanged lines. | |
2634 When omitted a context of six lines is used. | |
2635 See |fold-diff|. | |
2636 | |
14864 | 2637 iblank Ignore changes where lines are all blank. Adds |
2638 the "-B" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2639 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2640 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2641 exactly. | |
2642 NOTE: the diff windows will get out of sync, | |
2643 because no differences between blank lines are | |
2644 taken into account. | |
2645 | |
7 | 2646 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A" |
2647 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag | |
2648 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty. | |
2649 | |
2650 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds | |
2651 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2652 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2653 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2654 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing | |
2655 white space, but not leading white space. | |
2656 | |
14864 | 2657 iwhiteall Ignore all white space changes. Adds |
2658 the "-w" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2659 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2660 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2661 exactly. | |
2662 | |
2663 iwhiteeol Ignore white space changes at end of line. | |
2664 Adds the "-Z" flag to the "diff" command if | |
2665 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation | |
2666 of the "diff" command for what this does | |
2667 exactly. | |
2668 | |
766 | 2669 horizontal Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless |
2670 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2671 | |
2672 vertical Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless | |
2673 explicitly specified otherwise). | |
2674 | |
12971
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2675 hiddenoff Do not use diff mode for a buffer when it |
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2676 becomes hidden. |
ca3cb1997f08
patch 8.0.1361: some users don't want to diff with hidden buffers
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12968
diff
changeset
|
2677 |
766 | 2678 foldcolumn:{n} Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when |
2679 starting diff mode. Without this 2 is used. | |
2680 | |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2681 internal Use the internal diff library. This is |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2682 ignored when 'diffexpr' is set. *E960* |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2683 When running out of memory when writing a |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2684 buffer this item will be ignored for diffs |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2685 involving that buffer. Set the 'verbose' |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2686 option to see when this happens. |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2687 |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2688 indent-heuristic |
15033 | 2689 Use the indent heuristic for the internal |
2690 diff library. | |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2691 |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2692 algorithm:{text} Use the specified diff algorithm with the |
15033 | 2693 internal diff engine. Currently supported |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2694 algorithms are: |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2695 myers the default algorithm |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2696 minimal spend extra time to generate the |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2697 smallest possible diff |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2698 patience patience diff algorithm |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2699 histogram histogram diff algorithm |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2700 |
7 | 2701 Examples: > |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2702 :set diffopt=internal,filler,context:4 |
7 | 2703 :set diffopt= |
14696
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2704 :set diffopt=internal,filler,foldcolumn:3 |
195e8b1fcbbf
patch 8.1.0360: using an external diff program is slow and inflexible
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14695
diff
changeset
|
2705 :set diffopt-=internal " do NOT use the internal diff parser |
7 | 2706 < |
2707 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'* | |
2708 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off) | |
2709 global | |
2710 {not in Vi} | |
2711 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs| | |
2712 feature} | |
2713 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS> | |
2714 {char2}. See |digraphs|. | |
2715 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
2716 | |
2717 *'directory'* *'dir'* | |
2718 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:", | |
5555 | 2719 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,$TEMP,c:\tmp,c:\temp" |
7 | 2720 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp") |
2721 global | |
2722 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas. | |
2723 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is | |
2724 possible. | |
2725 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is | |
2726 impossible!). | |
2727 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as | |
2728 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so | |
2729 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden" | |
2730 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible. | |
33 | 2731 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to |
7 | 2732 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading |
2733 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file. | |
14475
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2734 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//", |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2735 the swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2736 with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2737 ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory. |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2738 On Win32, it is also possible to end with "\\". However, When a |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2739 separating comma is following, you must use "//", since "\\" will |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2740 include the comma in the file name. Therefore it is recommended to |
dddba3937532
patch 8.1.0251: using full path is not supported for 'backupdir'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14421
diff
changeset
|
2741 use '//', instead of '\\'. |
7 | 2742 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part |
2743 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory | |
2744 name, precede it with a backslash. | |
2745 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash. | |
2746 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'. | |
2747 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2748 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to | |
2749 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: > | |
2750 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces | |
2751 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start | |
2752 of the option is removed. | |
2753 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing | |
2754 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is | |
2755 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file. | |
2756 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better | |
2757 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap | |
2758 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your | |
2759 home directory is tried first. | |
2760 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
2761 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
2762 uses another default. | |
2763 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2764 security reasons. | |
2765 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"} | |
2766 | |
2767 *'display'* *'dy'* | |
9737
35ce559b8553
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc8801c9317eb721a2ee91322669f2dd5d136380
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9669
diff
changeset
|
2768 'display' 'dy' string (default "", set to "truncate" in |
35ce559b8553
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc8801c9317eb721a2ee91322669f2dd5d136380
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9669
diff
changeset
|
2769 |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 2770 global |
2771 {not in Vi} | |
2772 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of | |
2773 flags: | |
2774 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line | |
9665
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2775 in a window will be displayed. "@@@" is put in the |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2776 last columns of the last screen line to indicate the |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2777 rest of the line is not displayed. |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2778 truncate Like "lastline", but "@@@" is displayed in the first |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2779 column of the last screen line. Overrules "lastline". |
7 | 2780 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx> |
2781 instead of using ^C and ~C. | |
2782 | |
10211
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
2783 When neither "lastline" nor "truncate" is included, a last line that |
9665
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2784 doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines. |
b193bdb6ea25
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ad9c2a08f0509294269a2f11a59a438b944bdd5a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9533
diff
changeset
|
2785 |
7 | 2786 *'eadirection'* *'ead'* |
2787 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both") | |
2788 global | |
2789 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
2790 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 2791 feature} |
2792 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies: | |
2793 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected | |
2794 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected | |
2795 both width and height of windows is affected | |
2796 | |
2797 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'* | |
2798 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off) | |
2799 global | |
2800 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be | |
2801 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See | |
2802 also 'gdefault' option. | |
11442 | 2803 Switching this option on may break plugins! |
7 | 2804 |
8876
47f17f66da3d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/03413f44167c4b5cd0012def9bb331e2518c83cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8835
diff
changeset
|
2805 *'emoji'* *'emo'* *'noemoji'* *'noemo'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2806 'emoji' 'emo' boolean (default: on) |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2807 global |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2808 {not in Vi} |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2809 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2810 feature} |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2811 When on all Unicode emoji characters are considered to be full width. |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2812 |
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
2813 |
7 | 2814 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543* |
2815 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG) | |
2816 global | |
2817 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
2818 feature} | |
2819 {not in Vi} | |
2820 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in | |
2821 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the | |
2822 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work | |
2823 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values. | |
2824 | |
2825 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the | |
39 | 2826 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid. |
7 | 2827 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim |
1152 | 2828 starts up. See |multibyte|. To reload the menus see |:menutrans|. |
7 | 2829 |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2830 This option cannot be set from a |modeline|. It would most likely |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2831 corrupt the text. |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
2832 |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
2833 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 or later, it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
2834 to "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of |
7 | 2835 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and |
2836 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made | |
10 | 2837 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal |
7 | 2838 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files |
2839 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty). | |
2840 | |
2841 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'. | |
10 | 2842 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with |
7 | 2843 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'. |
2844 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2845 If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2846 can use: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2847 if has("multi_byte_encoding") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2848 < |
7 | 2849 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will |
2850 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If | |
2851 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be | |
2852 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|. | |
2853 | |
2854 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand | |
2855 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary. | |
2856 | |
2857 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
2858 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated | |
2859 to '-' signs. | |
2860 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name. | |
2861 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes | |
2862 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8". | |
2863 | |
2864 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected. | |
2865 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the | |
2866 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and | |
2867 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using | |
2868 utf-8. | |
2869 | |
2870 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8. | |
2871 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the | |
2872 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus | |
2873 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has | |
2874 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty. | |
448 | 2875 |
2876 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was | |
2877 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed. | |
7 | 2878 |
2879 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'* | |
2880 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on) | |
2881 local to buffer | |
2882 {not in Vi} | |
2883 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option | |
6933 | 2884 is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the |
2885 last line in the file. This option is automatically set or reset when | |
2886 starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL> | |
2887 for the last line in the file. Normally you don't have to set or | |
2888 reset this option. | |
2889 When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when | |
2890 writing the file. When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used | |
2891 to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so | |
2892 that when you write the file the situation from the original file can | |
2893 be kept. But you can change it if you want to. | |
7 | 2894 |
2895 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'* | |
2896 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on) | |
2897 global | |
2898 {not in Vi} | |
2899 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after | |
33 | 2900 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the |
2901 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the | |
2902 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When | |
2903 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it | |
2904 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright'). | |
7 | 2905 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size |
2906 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The | |
2907 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected. | |
1354 | 2908 Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting |
2909 'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2910 If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2911 currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2912 the future). |
7 | 2913 |
2914 *'equalprg'* *'ep'* | |
2915 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "") | |
2916 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2917 {not in Vi} | |
2918 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty | |
1621 | 2919 the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2920 or 'indentexpr'. When Vim was compiled without internal formatting, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
2921 the "indent" program is used. |
10 | 2922 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
7 | 2923 about including spaces and backslashes. |
2924 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2925 security reasons. | |
2926 | |
2927 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'* | |
2928 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off) | |
2929 global | |
2930 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only | |
2931 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always | |
2932 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal | |
10 | 2933 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep, |
6949 | 2934 screen flash or do nothing. See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the |
2935 bell. | |
7 | 2936 |
2937 *'errorfile'* *'ef'* | |
2938 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err", | |
2939 others: "errors.err") | |
2940 global | |
2941 {not in Vi} | |
2942 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2943 feature} | |
2944 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|). | |
2945 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the | |
2946 following argument. See |-q|. | |
2947 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that. | |
2948 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
2949 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
2950 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
2951 security reasons. | |
2952 | |
2953 *'errorformat'* *'efm'* | |
2954 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long) | |
2955 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
2956 {not in Vi} | |
2957 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
2958 feature} | |
2959 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file | |
2960 (see |errorformat|). | |
2961 | |
2962 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'* | |
2963 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
2964 global | |
2965 {not in Vi} | |
2966 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert | |
2967 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be | |
2968 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of | |
2969 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of | |
2970 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to | |
2971 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that | |
2972 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys | |
2973 won't work by default. | |
2974 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
2975 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
2976 | |
2977 *'eventignore'* *'ei'* | |
2978 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "") | |
2979 global | |
2980 {not in Vi} | |
2981 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored. | |
844 | 2982 When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand |
2983 events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed. | |
7 | 2984 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: > |
2985 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave | |
2986 < | |
2987 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'* | |
2988 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off) | |
2989 local to buffer | |
2990 {not in Vi} | |
2991 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a | |
10 | 2992 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and |
7 | 2993 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is |
2994 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
2995 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and restored when |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
2996 the 'paste' option is reset. |
7 | 2997 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2998 | |
2999 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'* | |
3000 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off) | |
3001 global | |
3002 {not in Vi} | |
3003 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current | |
10027
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3004 directory. |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3005 |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3006 Setting this option is a potential security leak. E.g., consider |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3007 unpacking a package or fetching files from github, a .vimrc in there |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3008 might be a trojan horse. BETTER NOT SET THIS OPTION! |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3009 Instead, define an autocommand in your .vimrc to set options for a |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3010 matching directory. |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3011 |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3012 If you do switch this option on you should also consider setting the |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3013 'secure' option (see |initialization|). |
018fead968c1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/36f44c21da2e912c008683a0c4447fca2a071e9a
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9975
diff
changeset
|
3014 Also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|. |
7 | 3015 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
3016 security reasons. | |
3017 | |
3018 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213* | |
3019 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "") | |
3020 local to buffer | |
3021 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
3022 feature} | |
3023 {not in Vi} | |
3024 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3025 |
7 | 3026 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3027 done when writing the file. For reading see below. |
7 | 3028 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be |
3029 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file). | |
11062 | 3030 No error will be given when the value is set, only when it is used, |
3031 only when writing a file. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3032 Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3033 both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8. That's |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3034 because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8. |
7 | 3035 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3036 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3037 is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3038 results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3039 characters may be lost! |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3040 |
7 | 3041 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be |
3042 specified that can be handled by the converter, see | |
3043 |mbyte-conversion|. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3044 |
7 | 3045 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'. |
3046 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting | |
1152 | 3047 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument. One exception: when |
3048 'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used. | |
692 | 3049 For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used. |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3050 |
7 | 3051 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored. |
3052 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus | |
3053 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are | |
3054 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for | |
3055 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example | |
3056 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2". | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3057 |
7 | 3058 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' |
3059 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
2317
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3060 |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3061 Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3062 AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3063 written. If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3064 'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q". |
2b2cd34569eb
Disallow setting 'enc' in a modeline. (Patrick Texier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2314
diff
changeset
|
3065 |
7 | 3066 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. |
3067 | |
3068 *'fe'* | |
3069 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the | |
10 | 3070 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The |
7 | 3071 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used. |
3072 | |
3073 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'* | |
39 | 3074 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", |
3075 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when | |
3076 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value) | |
7 | 3077 global |
3078 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
3079 feature} | |
3080 {not in Vi} | |
3081 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit | |
3082 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first | |
3083 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one | |
3084 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works, | |
10 | 3085 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to |
7 | 3086 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used. |
3087 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When | |
3088 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants) | |
3089 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse | |
3090 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not | |
596 | 3091 "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost! You can use |
3092 the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters | |
3093 that can't be converted. | |
7 | 3094 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings |
3095 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except | |
3096 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer | |
3097 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your | |
3098 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: > | |
3099 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 | | |
3100 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif | |
3101 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain | |
3102 non-blank characters. | |
596 | 3103 When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is |
3104 not used. | |
692 | 3105 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value |
3106 of 'fileencoding' is used instead. You can set it with: > | |
3107 :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2 | |
3108 < This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than | |
3109 an empty file. | |
7 | 3110 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM |
3111 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded | |
3112 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly. | |
3113 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last, | |
3114 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always | |
3115 accepted. | |
39 | 3116 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the |
3117 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful | |
3118 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a | |
3119 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian. | |
777 | 3120 When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte |
3121 sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8. You can use the |8g8| | |
3122 command to find the illegal byte sequence. | |
7 | 3123 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG: |
3124 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used | |
3125 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8 | |
3126 file | |
3127 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used | |
3128 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified. | |
3129 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values. | |
3130 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file | |
3131 is read. | |
3132 | |
3133 *'fileformat'* *'ff'* | |
3134 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos", | |
3135 Unix default: "unix", | |
3136 Macintosh default: "mac") | |
3137 local to buffer | |
3138 {not in Vi} | |
3139 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for | |
3140 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file: | |
3141 dos <CR> <NL> | |
3142 unix <NL> | |
3143 mac <CR> | |
3144 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored. | |
3145 See |file-formats| and |file-read|. | |
3146 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'. | |
3147 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O | |
4264 | 3148 works like it was set to "unix". |
7 | 3149 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and |
3150 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off. | |
3151 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified' | |
3152 option is set, because the file would be different when written. | |
3153 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off. | |
3154 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos", | |
3155 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset. | |
3156 | |
3157 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'* | |
3158 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default: | |
3159 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix", | |
3160 Vim Unix: "unix,dos", | |
3161 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos", | |
3162 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos", | |
3163 Vi others: "") | |
3164 global | |
3165 {not in Vi} | |
3166 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when | |
3167 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing | |
3168 buffer: | |
3169 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used | |
3170 always. It is not set automatically. | |
3171 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer | |
10 | 3172 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The |
7 | 3173 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing |
3174 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to. | |
3175 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic | |
3176 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to | |
3177 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>: | |
3178 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos", | |
3179 'fileformat' is set to "dos". | |
3180 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat' | |
10 | 3181 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a |
7 | 3182 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos". |
6647 | 3183 3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if a <CR> is found, and |
3184 if 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac". | |
2587 | 3185 This means that "mac" is only chosen when: |
3186 "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and | |
3187 "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file. | |
3188 Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before | |
3189 the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in | |
2642 | 3190 the first few lines, "mac" is used. |
7 | 3191 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from |
3192 'fileformats' is used. | |
3193 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but | |
3194 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that | |
3195 file only, the option is not changed. | |
3196 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used. | |
3197 | |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
3198 When Vim starts up with an empty buffer the first item is used. You |
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
3199 can overrule this by setting 'fileformat' in your .vimrc. |
2662 | 3200 |
7 | 3201 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that |
3202 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be | |
3203 done: | |
3204 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos | |
3205 format will be used. | |
3206 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection | |
3207 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a | |
3208 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is | |
3209 used. | |
3210 Also see |file-formats|. | |
3211 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty | |
3212 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset, | |
3213 otherwise 'textauto' is set. | |
3214 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3215 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3216 | |
4264 | 3217 *'fileignorecase'* *'fic'* *'nofileignorecase'* *'nofic'* |
3218 'fileignorecase' 'fic' boolean (default on for systems where case in file | |
3219 names is normally ignored) | |
4242 | 3220 global |
3221 {not in Vi} | |
3222 When set case is ignored when using file names and directories. | |
3223 See 'wildignorecase' for only ignoring case when doing completion. | |
3224 | |
7 | 3225 *'filetype'* *'ft'* |
3226 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "") | |
3227 local to buffer | |
3228 {not in Vi} | |
3229 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered. | |
3230 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be | |
3231 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file | |
3232 name. | |
3233 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type. | |
3234 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable | |
3235 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype| | |
3236 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline, | |
3237 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized. | |
782 | 3238 Example, for in an IDL file: |
3239 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~ | |
3240 |FileType| |filetypes| | |
3241 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
3242 names. Example: | |
3243 /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
3244 This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype. | |
3245 This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files. More than | |
3246 one dot may appear. | |
7 | 3247 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or |
3248 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 3249 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 3250 |
3251 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'* | |
3252 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-") | |
3253 global | |
3254 {not in Vi} | |
3255 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| | |
3256 and |+folding| features} | |
3257 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators. | |
3258 It is a comma separated list of items: | |
3259 | |
3260 item default Used for ~ | |
3261 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window | |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3262 stlnc:c ' ' or '=' statusline of the non-current windows |
7 | 3263 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit| |
3264 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext' | |
3265 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option | |
3266 | |
10 | 3267 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3268 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '=' |
7 | 3269 otherwise. |
3270 | |
3271 Example: > | |
8061
abd64cf67bcf
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/38a55639d603823efcf2d2fdf542dbffdeb60b75
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7876
diff
changeset
|
3272 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:=,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:- |
7 | 3273 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also |
3274 be used when there is highlighting. | |
3275 | |
819 | 3276 for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported. |
3277 | |
7 | 3278 The highlighting used for these items: |
3279 item highlight group ~ | |
3280 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine| | |
3281 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC| | |
3282 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit| | |
3283 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded| | |
3284 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete| | |
3285 | |
6933 | 3286 *'fixendofline'* *'fixeol'* *'nofixendofline'* *'nofixeol'* |
3287 'fixendofline' 'fixeol' boolean (default on) | |
3288 local to buffer | |
3289 {not in Vi} | |
3290 When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file | |
3291 will be restored if missing. Turn this option off if you want to | |
3292 preserve the situation from the original file. | |
3293 When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't | |
3294 matter. | |
3295 See the 'endofline' option. | |
3296 | |
7 | 3297 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'* |
3298 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198* | |
3299 global | |
3300 {not in Vi} | |
3301 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
3302 feature} | |
3303 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set. | |
3304 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
10 | 3305 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|. |
7 | 3306 |
3307 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'* | |
3308 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "") | |
3309 global | |
3310 {not in Vi} | |
3311 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3312 feature} | |
3313 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and | |
3314 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to | |
3315 automatically close when moving out of them. | |
3316 | |
3317 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'* | |
3318 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0) | |
3319 local to window | |
3320 {not in Vi} | |
3321 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3322 feature} | |
3323 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side | |
3324 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum | |
3325 value is 12. | |
3326 See |folding|. | |
3327 | |
3328 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'* | |
3329 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on) | |
3330 local to window | |
3331 {not in Vi} | |
3332 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3333 feature} | |
3334 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly | |
3335 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with | |
3336 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled | |
10 | 3337 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when |
7 | 3338 'foldenable' is off. |
3339 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold. | |
3340 See |folding|. | |
3341 | |
3342 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'* | |
3343 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0") | |
3344 local to window | |
3345 {not in Vi} | |
3346 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
3347 or |+eval| features} |
7 | 3348 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated |
634 | 3349 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. |
782 | 3350 |
3682 | 3351 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a |
3352 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3353 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3354 on. |
634 | 3355 |
3356 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3357 evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|. | |
7 | 3358 |
3359 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'* | |
3360 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#") | |
3361 local to window | |
3362 {not in Vi} | |
3363 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3364 feature} | |
3365 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with | |
3366 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding | |
10 | 3367 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character. |
7 | 3368 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|. |
3369 | |
3370 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'* | |
3371 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0) | |
3372 local to window | |
3373 {not in Vi} | |
3374 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3375 feature} | |
3376 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed. | |
3377 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will | |
3378 close fewer folds. | |
3379 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|. | |
3380 See |fold-foldlevel|. | |
3381 | |
3382 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'* | |
3383 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1) | |
3384 global | |
3385 {not in Vi} | |
3386 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3387 feature} | |
3388 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window. | |
3389 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero), | |
3390 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99). | |
3391 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline | |
10 | 3392 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also |
7 | 3393 ignores this option and closes all folds. |
3394 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to | |
3395 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files. | |
3396 When the value is negative, it is not used. | |
3397 | |
3398 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536* | |
3399 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}") | |
3400 local to window | |
3401 {not in Vi} | |
3402 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3403 feature} | |
3404 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There | |
3405 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The | |
3406 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow). | |
3407 See |fold-marker|. | |
3408 | |
3409 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'* | |
3410 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual") | |
3411 local to window | |
3412 {not in Vi} | |
3413 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3414 feature} | |
3415 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values: | |
3416 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually. | |
3417 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold. | |
3418 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line. | |
3419 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds. | |
3420 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds. | |
3421 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed. | |
3422 | |
3423 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'* | |
3424 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1) | |
3425 local to window | |
3426 {not in Vi} | |
3427 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3428 feature} | |
2709 | 3429 Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed |
3430 closed. Also for manually closed folds. With the default value of | |
3431 one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines. | |
3432 Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line. | |
2826 | 3433 Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed. After using |
7 | 3434 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller |
3435 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold. | |
3436 | |
3437 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'* | |
3438 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20) | |
3439 local to window | |
3440 {not in Vi} | |
3441 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3442 feature} | |
3443 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax" | |
3444 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more | |
3445 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20. | |
3446 | |
3447 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'* | |
3448 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix, | |
3449 search,tag,undo") | |
3450 global | |
3451 {not in Vi} | |
3452 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3453 feature} | |
3454 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the | |
3455 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated | |
3456 list of items. | |
2625 | 3457 NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. |
3458 Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect. | |
3459 (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself) | |
3460 | |
7 | 3461 item commands ~ |
3462 all any | |
3463 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc. | |
3464 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc. | |
3465 insert any command in Insert mode | |
3466 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc. | |
3467 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc. | |
3468 percent "%" | |
3469 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc. | |
3470 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc. | |
3471 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command) | |
819 | 3472 Also for |[s| and |]s|. |
7 | 3473 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc. |
3474 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R | |
3475 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%") | |
3476 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the | |
3477 whole closed fold. | |
3478 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it | |
3479 very difficult to move onto a closed fold. | |
3480 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open | |
3481 when text is inserted. | |
3482 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or | |
3483 set the 'foldclose' option to "all". | |
3484 | |
3485 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'* | |
3486 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()") | |
3487 local to window | |
3488 {not in Vi} | |
3489 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| | |
3490 feature} | |
3491 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed | |
3492 fold. See |fold-foldtext|. | |
3493 | |
3682 | 3494 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from a |
3495 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 3496 |
3497 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
3498 evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|. | |
3499 | |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3500 *'formatexpr'* *'fex'* |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3501 'formatexpr' 'fex' string (default "") |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3502 local to buffer |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3503 {not in Vi} |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3504 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3505 feature} |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3506 Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3507 operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions'). When this |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3508 option is empty 'formatprg' is used. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3509 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3510 The |v:lnum| variable holds the first line to be formatted. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3511 The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3512 The |v:char| variable holds the character that is going to be |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3513 inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3514 automatic formatting. This can be empty. Don't insert |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3515 it yet! |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3516 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3517 Example: > |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3518 :set formatexpr=mylang#Format() |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3519 < This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3520 autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload| |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3521 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3522 The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3523 text beyond that limit. This happens under the same conditions as |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3524 when internal formatting is used. Make sure the cursor is kept in the |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3525 same spot relative to the text then! The |mode()| function will |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3526 return "i" or "R" in this situation. |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
3527 |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3528 When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3529 the internal format mechanism. |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3530 |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3531 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3532 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. That stops the option from working, |
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3533 since changing the buffer text is not allowed. |
11160 | 3534 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
9286
64035abb986b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/c95a302a4c42ec8230473cd4a5e0064d0a143aa8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9227
diff
changeset
|
3535 |
7 | 3536 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'* |
3537 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt") | |
3538 local to buffer | |
3539 {not in Vi} | |
3540 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic | |
3541 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is | |
3542 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can | |
3543 be inserted for readability. | |
3544 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3545 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3546 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
3547 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
3548 | |
41 | 3549 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'* |
3550 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*") | |
3551 local to buffer | |
3552 {not in Vi} | |
3553 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for | |
3554 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'. | |
3555 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for | |
140 | 3556 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match |
41 | 3557 while still checking more characters. There must be a character |
3558 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled | |
3559 like there is no match. | |
3560 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation | |
3561 character and white space. | |
3562 | |
7 | 3563 *'formatprg'* *'fp'* |
3564 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "") | |
10579
688b97124d23
patch 8.0.0179: cannot have a local value for 'formatprg'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10498
diff
changeset
|
3565 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 3566 {not in Vi} |
3567 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines | |
667 | 3568 selected with the |gq| operator. The program must take the input on |
7 | 3569 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is |
557 | 3570 such a program. |
667 | 3571 If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead. |
3572 Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal | |
3573 format function will be used |C-indenting|. | |
557 | 3574 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
3575 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3682 | 3576 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
3577 security reasons. | |
667 | 3578 |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
3579 *'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'* |
36 | 3580 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on) |
3581 global | |
3582 {not in Vi} | |
3583 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a | |
3584 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely | |
3585 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This | |
3586 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop | |
3587 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that | |
3588 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On | |
3589 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always | |
3590 off. | |
3591 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files. | |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
3592 'fsync' also applies to |writefile()|, unless a flag is used to |
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
3593 overrule it. |
36 | 3594 |
7 | 3595 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'* |
3596 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off) | |
3597 global | |
3598 {not in Vi} | |
3599 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that | |
3600 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag | |
3601 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution | |
3602 of all or one match. See |complex-change|. | |
3603 | |
3604 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~ | |
3605 :s/// subst. all subst. one | |
3606 :s///g subst. one subst. all | |
3607 :s///gg subst. all subst. one | |
3608 | |
3609 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
11516
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3610 DEPRECATED: Setting this option may break plugins that are not aware |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3611 of this option. Also, many users get confused that adding the /g flag |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
3612 has the opposite effect of that it normally does. |
7 | 3613 |
3614 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'* | |
6213 | 3615 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l:%m,%f:%l%m,%f %l%m") |
7 | 3616 global |
3617 {not in Vi} | |
3618 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output. | |
3619 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the | |
3620 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|. | |
3621 | |
3622 *'grepprg'* *'gp'* | |
3623 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ", | |
3624 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null", | |
3625 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n", | |
3626 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ") | |
3627 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
3628 {not in Vi} | |
233 | 3629 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%' |
7 | 3630 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command- |
3631 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments | |
3632 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See | |
3633 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
3634 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep" | |
3635 also work well with a single file: > | |
3636 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH | |
161 | 3637 < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command |
657 | 3638 works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like |
3639 |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|. | |
41 | 3640 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there |
7 | 3641 apply equally to 'grepprg'. |
3642 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found, | |
3643 otherwise it's "grep -n". | |
3644 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
3645 security reasons. | |
3646 | |
3647 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549* | |
3648 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3649 ve:ver35-Cursor, | |
3650 o:hor50-Cursor, | |
3651 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3652 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor, | |
3653 sm:block-Cursor | |
3654 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175", | |
3655 for MS-DOS and Win32 console: | |
3656 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15, | |
3657 r-cr:hor30,sm:block") | |
3658 global | |
3659 {not in Vi} | |
3660 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and | |
3661 for MS-DOS and Win32 console} | |
3662 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different | |
10 | 3663 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only |
7 | 3664 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by |
3665 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or | |
3666 horizontal cursor. | |
6727 | 3667 For a console the 't_SI', 't_SR', and 't_EI' escape sequences are |
3668 used. | |
7 | 3669 |
10 | 3670 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a |
7 | 3671 mode-list and an argument-list: |
3672 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,.. | |
3673 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes: | |
3674 n Normal mode | |
3675 v Visual mode | |
3676 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
3677 if not specified) | |
3678 o Operator-pending mode | |
3679 i Insert mode | |
3680 r Replace mode | |
3681 c Command-line Normal (append) mode | |
3682 ci Command-line Insert mode | |
3683 cr Command-line Replace mode | |
3684 sm showmatch in Insert mode | |
3685 a all modes | |
3686 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments: | |
3687 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height | |
3688 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width | |
3689 block block cursor, fills the whole character | |
3690 [only one of the above three should be present] | |
3691 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking* | |
3692 blinkon{N} | |
3693 blinkoff{N} | |
3694 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before | |
3695 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that | |
3696 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the | |
3697 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one | |
3698 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The | |
3699 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250". | |
3700 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This | |
3701 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch | |
3702 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only | |
3703 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while | |
3704 executing a command. | |
3705 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see | |
3706 |xterm-blink|. | |
3707 {group-name} | |
3708 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font | |
3709 for the cursor | |
3710 {group-name}/{group-name} | |
3711 Two highlight group names, the first is used when | |
3712 no language mappings are used, the other when they | |
3713 are. |language-mapping| | |
3714 | |
3715 Examples of parts: | |
3716 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a | |
3717 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor" | |
3718 highlight group | |
3719 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150 | |
3720 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a | |
3721 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the | |
3722 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit | |
3723 faster. | |
3724 | |
3725 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for | |
3726 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used | |
3727 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off | |
3728 blinking: "a:blinkon0" | |
3729 | |
3730 Examples of cursor highlighting: > | |
3731 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE | |
3732 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg | |
3733 < | |
3734 *'guifont'* *'gfn'* | |
2908 | 3735 *E235* *E596* |
7 | 3736 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "") |
3737 global | |
3738 {not in Vi} | |
3739 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3740 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim. | |
3741 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When | |
3742 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other | |
3743 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas. | |
3744 The first valid font is used. | |
8 | 3745 |
170 | 3746 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is |
3747 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used. | |
8 | 3748 |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3749 Note: As to the GTK GUIs, no error is given against any invalid names, |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3750 and the first element of the list is always picked up and made use of. |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3751 This is because, instead of identifying a given name with a font, the |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3752 GTK GUIs use it to construct a pattern and try to look up a font which |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3753 best matches the pattern among available fonts, and this way, the |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3754 matching never fails. An invalid name doesn't matter because a number |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3755 of font properties other than name will do to get the matching done. |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3756 |
7 | 3757 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name |
3758 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra | |
3759 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also | |
3760 |option-backslash|. For example: > | |
3761 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas | |
8 | 3762 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it |
7 | 3763 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead. |
8 | 3764 |
3765 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting. | |
3766 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource | |
3767 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it | |
3768 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in | |
3769 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim | |
3770 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts. | |
3771 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3772 For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: > |
8 | 3773 :set guifont=* |
3774 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want. | |
3775 | |
3776 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a | |
3777 way to set 'guifont' for various systems. | |
3778 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3779 For the GTK+ 2 and 3 GUIs, the font name looks like this: > |
7 | 3780 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11 |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3781 < That's all. XLFDs are not used. For Chinese this is reported to work |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3782 well: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3783 if has("gui_gtk2") |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3784 set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3785 set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3786 endif |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
3787 < |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3788 (Replace gui_gtk2 with gui_gtk3 for the GTK+ 3 GUI) |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3789 |
170 | 3790 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: > |
3791 :set guifont=Monaco:h10 | |
853 | 3792 < Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems. |
3793 *E236* | |
7 | 3794 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3795 width). An exception is GTK: all fonts are accepted, but mono-spaced |
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3796 fonts look best. |
8 | 3797 |
7 | 3798 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel" |
3799 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts. | |
8 | 3800 |
7 | 3801 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245* |
3802 - takes these options in the font name: | |
3803 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3804 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point) | |
3805 b - bold | |
3806 i - italic | |
3807 u - underline | |
3808 s - strikeout | |
233 | 3809 cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC, |
7 | 3810 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK, |
3811 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS, | |
3812 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC. | |
22 | 3813 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT". |
8876
47f17f66da3d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/03413f44167c4b5cd0012def9bb331e2518c83cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8835
diff
changeset
|
3814 qXX - quality XX. Valid quality names are: PROOF, DRAFT, |
9097
071f9da012fb
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/06d2d38ab7564e1f784b1058a4ef4580cd6d1810
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9027
diff
changeset
|
3815 ANTIALIASED, NONANTIALIASED, CLEARTYPE, DEFAULT. |
8835
c1a5623cfc86
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/7c1c6dbb6817640fd3956a0d5417da23fde336d8
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8748
diff
changeset
|
3816 Normally you would use "qDEFAULT". |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
3817 Some quality values are not supported in legacy OSs. |
7 | 3818 |
3819 Use a ':' to separate the options. | |
3820 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use | |
3821 backslashes to escape the spaces. | |
3822 - Examples: > | |
3823 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN | |
3824 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5 | |
3825 < See also |font-sizes|. | |
3826 | |
3827 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'* | |
3828 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598* | |
3829 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "") | |
3830 global | |
3831 {not in Vi} | |
3832 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
3833 with the |+xfontset| feature} | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3834 {not available in the GTK+ GUI} |
7 | 3835 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first |
3836 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See | |
3837 |xfontset|. | |
3838 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as | |
3839 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the | |
3840 |:highlight| command. | |
3841 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the | |
3842 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting | |
3843 'guifontset' will fail. | |
3844 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont' | |
3845 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be | |
3846 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name, | |
3847 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative | |
3848 fontset names. | |
3849 This example works on many X11 systems: > | |
3850 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-* | |
3851 < | |
3852 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534* | |
3853 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "") | |
3854 global | |
3855 {not in Vi} | |
3856 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
3857 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used | |
3858 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is | |
3859 used. | |
3860 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one | |
3861 specified with 'guifont' and the same height. | |
3862 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3863 All GUI versions but GTK+: |
7 | 3864 |
3865 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and | |
3866 'guifontset' is empty or invalid. | |
3867 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and | |
3868 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching | |
3869 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it. | |
3870 | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
3871 GTK+ GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk* |
7 | 3872 |
3873 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width | |
3874 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8". | |
3875 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide' | |
10 | 3876 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the |
7 | 3877 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need |
3878 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice | |
3879 made by Pango/Xft. | |
3880 | |
4055 | 3881 Windows +multibyte only: *guifontwide_win_mbyte* |
3882 | |
4073 | 3883 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is used for IME instead of 'guifont'. |
4055 | 3884 |
7 | 3885 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'* |
3886 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50) | |
3887 global | |
3888 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI} | |
3889 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting | |
3890 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started, | |
3891 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will | |
10 | 3892 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel |
7 | 3893 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the |
3894 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the | |
3895 screen. | |
3896 | |
3897 *'guioptions'* *'go'* | |
14945 | 3898 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "egmrLtT" (MS-Windows, |
3899 "t" is removed in |defaults.vim|), | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3900 "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena), |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
3901 ) |
7 | 3902 global |
3903 {not in Vi} | |
3904 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
8 | 3905 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a |
7 | 3906 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the |
3907 GUI should be used. | |
3908 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the | |
3909 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|. | |
3910 | |
13470
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3911 Valid characters are as follows: |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3912 *'go-!'* |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3913 '!' External commands are executed in a terminal window. Without |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3914 this flag the MS-Windows GUI will open a console window to |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3915 execute the command. The Unix GUI will simulate a dumb |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3916 terminal to list the command output. |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3917 The terminal window will be positioned at the bottom, and grow |
6faef782f50b
patch 8.0.1609: shell commands in the GUI use a dumb terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13437
diff
changeset
|
3918 upwards as needed. |
14999 | 3919 *'go-a'* |
7 | 3920 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started, |
3921 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of | |
3922 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the | |
3923 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other | |
3924 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode | |
3925 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an | |
3926 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text | |
3927 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register. | |
3928 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other | |
3929 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended. | |
3930 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the | |
3931 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to | |
3932 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register. | |
3933 The same applies to the modeless selection. | |
3674 | 3934 *'go-P'* |
3935 'P' Like autoselect but using the "+ register instead of the "* | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
3936 register. |
1152 | 3937 *'go-A'* |
10 | 3938 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only |
7 | 3939 applies to the modeless selection. |
3940 | |
3941 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~ | |
3942 "" - - | |
3943 "a" yes yes | |
3944 "A" - yes | |
3945 "aA" yes yes | |
3946 | |
1152 | 3947 *'go-c'* |
7 | 3948 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple |
3949 choices. | |
1152 | 3950 *'go-e'* |
697 | 3951 'e' Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'. |
688 | 3952 'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels. |
3953 When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used. | |
857 | 3954 The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently |
1621 | 3955 GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows. |
1152 | 3956 *'go-f'* |
7 | 3957 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell |
3958 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the | |
3959 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you | |
3960 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the | |
3961 foreground. |gui-fork| | |
3962 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have | |
819 | 3963 happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read. |
1152 | 3964 *'go-i'* |
7 | 3965 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper |
3966 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of | |
3967 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3968 *'go-m'* |
7 | 3969 'm' Menu bar is present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3970 *'go-M'* |
10 | 3971 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note |
7 | 3972 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before |
819 | 3973 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc| |
7 | 3974 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
3975 `:syntax on` and `:filetype on` commands load the menu too). |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3976 *'go-g'* |
7 | 3977 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If |
3978 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all. | |
3979 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items. | |
1152 | 3980 *'go-t'* |
7 | 3981 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32, |
3982 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI. | |
1152 | 3983 *'go-T'* |
236 | 3984 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon |
856 | 3985 and Athena GUIs. |
1152 | 3986 *'go-r'* |
7 | 3987 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3988 *'go-R'* |
7 | 3989 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3990 split window. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3991 *'go-l'* |
7 | 3992 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
3993 *'go-L'* |
7 | 3994 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically |
3995 split window. | |
1152 | 3996 *'go-b'* |
7 | 3997 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on |
3998 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h' | |
3999 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
4000 *'go-h'* |
7 | 4001 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor |
4002 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll| | |
4003 | |
4004 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if | |
4005 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information. | |
4006 | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
4007 *'go-v'* |
7 | 4008 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included, |
4009 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a | |
4010 vertical layout is used anyway. | |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
4011 *'go-p'* |
7 | 4012 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some |
4013 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at | |
4014 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done | |
819 | 4015 before starting the GUI. Set it in your |gvimrc|. Adding or |
7 | 4016 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect. |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
4017 *'go-F'* |
10 | 4018 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|. |
12802
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4019 *'go-k'* |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4020 'k' Keep the GUI window size when adding/removing a scrollbar, or |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4021 toolbar, tabline, etc. Instead, the behavior is similar to |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4022 when the window is maximized and will adjust 'lines' and |
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4023 'columns' to fit to the window. Without the 'k' flag Vim will |
12865
ebb4f6c93598
patch 8.0.1309: cannot use 'balloonexpr' in a terminal
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12826
diff
changeset
|
4024 try to keep 'lines' and 'columns' the same when adding and |
12802
29a728529f92
patch 8.0.1278: GUI window always resizes when adding scrollbar
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12785
diff
changeset
|
4025 removing GUI components. |
1152 | 4026 |
7 | 4027 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'* |
4028 'guipty' boolean (default on) | |
4029 global | |
4030 {not in Vi} | |
4031 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled} | |
4032 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for | |
4033 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|. | |
4034 | |
688 | 4035 *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'* |
4036 'guitablabel' 'gtl' string (default empty) | |
4037 global | |
4038 {not in Vi} | |
692 | 4039 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4040 with the |+windows| feature} |
688 | 4041 When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab |
857 | 4042 pages line. When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a |
4043 default label. See |setting-guitablabel| for more info. | |
688 | 4044 |
692 | 4045 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
839 | 4046 'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below. |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
4047 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
4048 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. |
692 | 4049 |
688 | 4050 Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed. 'e' must be |
4051 present in 'guioptions'. For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is | |
4052 used. | |
4053 | |
839 | 4054 *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'* |
4055 'guitabtooltip' 'gtt' string (default empty) | |
4056 global | |
4057 {not in Vi} | |
4058 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4059 with the |+windows| feature} |
839 | 4060 When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab |
4061 pages line. When empty Vim will use a default tooltip. | |
4062 This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4063 You can include a line break. Simplest method is to use |:let|: > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4064 :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two" |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4065 < |
839 | 4066 |
7 | 4067 *'helpfile'* *'hf'* |
4068 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt" | |
4069 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt") | |
4070 global | |
4071 {not in Vi} | |
4072 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be | |
4073 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories | |
4074 in 'runtimepath' will be used. | |
4075 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example: | |
4076 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also | |
10 | 4077 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including |
7 | 4078 spaces and backslashes. |
4079 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4080 security reasons. | |
4081 | |
4082 *'helpheight'* *'hh'* | |
4083 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20) | |
4084 global | |
4085 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4086 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 4087 feature} |
4088 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the | |
4089 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the | |
4090 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other | |
4091 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is | |
4092 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable. | |
4093 | |
4094 *'helplang'* *'hlg'* | |
4095 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty) | |
4096 global | |
4097 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang| | |
4098 feature} | |
4099 {not in Vi} | |
4100 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language | |
4101 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always | |
4102 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over | |
4103 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that | |
4104 language and not in the English help. | |
4105 Example: > | |
4106 :set helplang=de,it | |
4107 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help | |
4108 files. | |
4109 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will | |
4110 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option. | |
4111 See |help-translated|. | |
4112 | |
4113 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'* | |
4114 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off) | |
4115 global | |
4116 {not in Vi} | |
4117 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a | |
4118 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still | |
4119 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course. | |
4120 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer | |
4121 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is | |
4122 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!' | |
10 | 4123 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|. |
12 | 4124 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option. |
7 | 4125 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|. |
4126 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers. | |
4127 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!". | |
4128 | |
4129 *'highlight'* *'hl'* | |
4130 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string): | |
9877
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4131 "8:SpecialKey,~:EndOfBuffer,@:NonText, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4132 d:Directory,e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4133 l:Search,m:MoreMsg,M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4134 N:CursorLineNr,r:Question,s:StatusLine, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4135 S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,t:Title, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4136 v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,f:Folded, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4137 F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,C:DiffChange, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4138 D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,>:SignColumn, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4139 B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,R:SpellRare, |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4140 L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,+:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel, |
11516
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
4141 x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb,*:TabLine, |
80491a71c716
patch 8.0.0641: cannot set a separate highlighting for the quickfix line
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11473
diff
changeset
|
4142 #:TabLineSel,_:TabLineFill,!:CursorColumn, |
11914 | 4143 .:CursorLine,o:ColorColumn,q:QuickFixLine, |
12254 | 4144 z:StatusLineTerm,Z:StatusLineTermNC") |
7 | 4145 global |
4146 {not in Vi} | |
4147 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various | |
4148 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The | |
4149 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to | |
10 | 4150 use for that occasion. The occasions are: |
7 | 4151 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map" |
9877
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4152 |hl-EndOfBuffer| ~ lines after the last line in the buffer |
7da89d9c744b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/58b853460add42098ab08017df9e030fb14fd34b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9860
diff
changeset
|
4153 |hl-NonText| @ '@' at the end of the window and |
7 | 4154 characters from 'showbreak' |
4155 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special | |
4156 things in listings | |
4157 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages | |
4158 h (obsolete, ignored) | |
4159 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting | |
4160 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch') | |
4161 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt| | |
4162 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --") | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4163 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4164 when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
4073 | 4165 |hl-CursorLineNr| N like n for when 'cursorline' or 'relativenumber' is |
4166 set. | |
7 | 4167 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
4168 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line| | |
12785 | 4169 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows |
7 | 4170 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |
4171 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows | |
4172 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode | |
4173 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the | |
4174 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and | |
4175 |xterm-clipboard|. | |
4176 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages | |
4177 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu' | |
4178 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds | |
4179 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn' | |
386 | 4180 |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode |
4181 |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode | |
4182 |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode | |
4183 |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode | |
7 | 4184 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs| |
221 | 4185 |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell| |
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2324
diff
changeset
|
4186 |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital |spell| |
221 | 4187 |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell| |
4188 |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell| | |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
4189 |hl-Conceal| - the placeholders used for concealed characters |
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
4190 (see 'conceallevel') |
540 | 4191 |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line |
4192 |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line | |
4193 |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar | |
4194 |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb | |
7 | 4195 |
4196 The display modes are: | |
4197 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me") | |
4198 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR") | |
4199 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me") | |
4200 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se") | |
4201 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue") | |
205 | 4202 c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce") |
12317
2a8890b80923
patch 8.0.1038: strike-through text not supported
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12293
diff
changeset
|
4203 t strikethrough (termcap entry "Ts" and "Te") |
7 | 4204 n no highlighting |
4205 - no highlighting | |
4206 : use a highlight group | |
4207 The default is used for occasions that are not included. | |
4208 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors| | |
4209 for an example. | |
4210 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of | |
4211 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type | |
4212 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to | |
4213 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion. | |
4214 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups. | |
4215 | |
4216 *'history'* *'hi'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4217 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 50, Vi default: 0, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4218 set to 200 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 4219 global |
4220 {not in Vi} | |
4221 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns | |
5991 | 4222 is remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in |
7 | 4223 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|). |
5991 | 4224 The maximum value is 10000. |
7 | 4225 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
4226 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4227 | |
4228 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'* | |
4229 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off) | |
4230 global | |
4231 {not in Vi} | |
4232 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
4233 feature} | |
4234 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set. | |
4235 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to | |
4236 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|. | |
4237 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4238 | |
4239 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'* | |
4240 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off) | |
4241 global | |
4242 {not in Vi} | |
4243 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
4244 feature} | |
4245 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on. | |
4246 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard. | |
4247 See |rileft.txt|. | |
4248 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4249 | |
11160 | 4250 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'* |
4251 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off) | |
4252 global | |
4253 {not in Vi} | |
4254 {not available when compiled without the | |
4255 |+extra_search| feature} | |
4256 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches. | |
4257 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the | |
4258 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by | |
4259 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets | |
4260 are not applied. | |
4261 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|. | |
4262 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it | |
4263 off with |:nohlsearch|. This does not change the option value, as | |
4264 soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back. | |
4265 'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches. | |
4266 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to | |
4267 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the | |
4268 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first | |
4269 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not | |
4270 drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line. | |
4271 You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup | |
4272 with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|. | |
4273 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4274 | |
7 | 4275 *'icon'* *'noicon'* |
4276 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
4277 global | |
4278 {not in Vi} | |
4279 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
4280 feature} | |
4281 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of | |
4282 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file | |
4283 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used. | |
4284 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option. | |
4285 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently | |
4286 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are | |
4287 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the | |
4288 builtin termcap). | |
4289 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
233 | 4290 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on |
7 | 4291 X11. |
6259 | 4292 For MS-Windows the icon can be changed, see |windows-icon|. |
7 | 4293 |
4294 *'iconstring'* | |
4295 'iconstring' string (default "") | |
4296 global | |
4297 {not in Vi} | |
4298 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
4299 feature} | |
4300 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of | |
4301 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on. | |
4302 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text | |
4303 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option). | |
4304 Does not work for MS Windows. | |
4305 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be | |
4306 restored if possible |X11|. | |
4307 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be | |
10 | 4308 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See |
7 | 4309 'titlestring' for example settings. |
4310 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
4311 | |
4312 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'* | |
4313 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off) | |
4314 global | |
4315 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags | |
4316 file. | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
4317 Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'. |
7 | 4318 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see |
4319 |/ignorecase|. | |
4320 | |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4321 *'imactivatefunc'* *'imaf'* |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4322 'imactivatefunc' 'imaf' string (default "") |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4323 global |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4324 {not in Vi} |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4325 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4326 feature} |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4327 This option specifies a function that will be called to |
12936
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4328 activate or deactivate the Input Method. |
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4329 It is not used in the GUI. |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4330 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4331 Example: > |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4332 function ImActivateFunc(active) |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4333 if a:active |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4334 ... do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4335 else |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4336 ... do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4337 endif |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4338 " return value is not used |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4339 endfunction |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4340 set imactivatefunc=ImActivateFunc |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4341 < |
7 | 4342 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'* |
4343 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "") | |
4344 global | |
4345 {not in Vi} | |
4346 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and | |
2209
d0ddf7ba1630
Included the patch to support netbeans in a terminal.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2207
diff
changeset
|
4347 |+GUI_GTK|} *E599* |
7 | 4348 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for |
4349 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control | |
4350 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'. | |
4351 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option | |
4352 tells Vim what the key is. | |
4353 Format: | |
4354 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING | |
4355 | |
4356 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored): | |
4357 S Shift key | |
4358 L Lock key | |
4359 C Control key | |
4360 1 Mod1 key | |
4361 2 Mod2 key | |
4362 3 Mod3 key | |
4363 4 Mod4 key | |
4364 5 Mod5 key | |
4365 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are | |
4366 both shift+ctrl+space. | |
4367 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING. | |
4368 | |
4369 Example: > | |
4370 :set imactivatekey=S-space | |
4371 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 + | |
4372 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean). | |
4373 | |
4374 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'* | |
4375 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off) | |
4376 global | |
4377 {not in Vi} | |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4378 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4379 feature} |
7 | 4380 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command |
4381 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that). | |
4382 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering | |
4383 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented | |
4384 characters with dead keys. | |
4385 | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4386 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'* |
7 | 4387 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI)) |
4388 global | |
4389 {not in Vi} | |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4390 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4391 feature} |
7 | 4392 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable |
4393 the IM when it doesn't work properly. | |
4394 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This | |
4395 may change in later releases. | |
4396 | |
4397 *'iminsert'* *'imi'* | |
12469
61d910f0999d
patch 8.0.1114: default for 'iminsert' is annoying
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12317
diff
changeset
|
4398 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0) |
7 | 4399 local to buffer |
4400 {not in Vi} | |
4401 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in | |
4402 Insert mode. Valid values: | |
4403 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4404 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4405 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4406 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc> | |
4407 this can be used: > | |
4408 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR> | |
4409 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert | |
4410 mode. | |
4411 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode | |
4412 |i_CTRL-^|. | |
4413 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name. | |
4414 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f". | |
4415 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4416 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4417 | |
12920
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4418 You can set 'imactivatefunc' and 'imstatusfunc' to handle IME/XIM |
14519 | 4419 via external command if Vim is not compiled with the |+xim|, |
12920
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4420 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime|. |
327e1264b9bf
patch 8.0.1336: cannot use imactivatefunc() unless compiled with +xim
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12865
diff
changeset
|
4421 |
7 | 4422 *'imsearch'* *'ims'* |
12469
61d910f0999d
patch 8.0.1114: default for 'iminsert' is annoying
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12317
diff
changeset
|
4423 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default -1) |
7 | 4424 local to buffer |
4425 {not in Vi} | |
4426 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when | |
4427 entering a search pattern. Valid values: | |
4428 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like | |
4429 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern | |
4430 0 :lmap is off and IM is off | |
4431 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off | |
4432 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON | |
4433 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode | |
4434 |c_CTRL-^|. | |
4435 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap' | |
4436 option to a valid keymap name. | |
4437 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM | |
4438 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then. | |
4439 | |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4440 *'imstatusfunc'* *'imsf'* |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4441 'imstatusfunc' 'imsf' string (default "") |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4442 global |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4443 {not in Vi} |
14019
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4444 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
dc67449d648c
patch 8.1.0027: difficult to make a plugin that feeds a line to a job
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14006
diff
changeset
|
4445 feature} |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4446 This option specifies a function that is called to obtain the status |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4447 of Input Method. It must return a positive number when IME is active. |
12936
c53a80f39a52
patch 8.0.1344: using 'imactivatefunc' in the GUI does not work
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12934
diff
changeset
|
4448 It is not used in the GUI. |
5008
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4449 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4450 Example: > |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4451 function ImStatusFunc() |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4452 let is_active = ...do something |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4453 return is_active ? 1 : 0 |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4454 endfunction |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4455 set imstatusfunc=ImStatusFunc |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4456 < |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4457 NOTE: This function is invoked very often. Keep it fast. |
3717d569027d
updated for version 7.3.1248
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4869
diff
changeset
|
4458 |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4459 *'imstyle'* *'imst'* |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4460 'imstyle' 'imst' number (default 1) |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4461 global |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4462 {not in Vi} |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4463 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4464 |+GUI_GTK|} |
12499 | 4465 This option specifies the input style of Input Method: |
4466 0 use on-the-spot style | |
4467 1 over-the-spot style | |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4468 See: |xim-input-style| |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4469 |
12559 | 4470 For a long time on-the-spot style had been used in the GTK version of |
4471 vim, however, it is known that it causes troubles when using mappings, | |
12293
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4472 |single-repeat|, etc. Therefore over-the-spot style becomes the |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4473 default now. This should work fine for most people, however if you |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4474 have any problem with it, try using on-the-spot style. |
1ff5e5dfa9b0
patch 8.0.1026: GTK on-the-spot input has problems
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12254
diff
changeset
|
4475 |
7 | 4476 *'include'* *'inc'* |
4477 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include") | |
4478 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
4479 {not in Vi} | |
4480 {not available when compiled without the | |
4481 |+find_in_path| feature} | |
10 | 4482 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search |
7 | 4483 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default |
4484 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i", | |
532 | 4485 "]I", "[d", etc. |
4486 Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that | |
534 | 4487 comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern |
4488 then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it | |
4489 appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters | |
4490 that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use | |
4491 'includeexpr' to process the matched text. | |
532 | 4492 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
7 | 4493 |
4494 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'* | |
4495 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "") | |
4496 local to buffer | |
4497 {not in Vi} | |
4498 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4499 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| features} |
7 | 4500 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include' |
10 | 4501 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: > |
7 | 4502 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g') |
4503 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected. | |
634 | 4504 |
7 | 4505 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be |
10 | 4506 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement. |
7 | 4507 Also used for |<cfile>|. |
4508 | |
3682 | 4509 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
4510 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 4511 |
4512 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4513 evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|. | |
4514 | |
7 | 4515 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4516 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim| if the |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4517 +reltime feature is supported) |
7 | 4518 global |
4519 {not in Vi} | |
4520 {not available when compiled without the | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4521 |+extra_search| features} |
17 | 4522 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed |
4523 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern | |
4524 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated | |
4525 often, this is only useful on fast terminals. | |
14637 | 4526 Also applies to the pattern in commands: > |
4527 :global | |
4528 :lvimgrep | |
4529 :lvimgrepadd | |
4530 :smagic | |
4531 :snomagic | |
4532 :sort | |
4533 :substitute | |
4534 :vglobal | |
4535 :vimgrep | |
4536 :vimgrepadd | |
4537 < Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its | |
17 | 4538 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You |
4539 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the | |
4540 cursor to the match. | |
10261
bdd7fc1a38c0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc08328821a2c11e33dfb1980332e4923ec64fca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10244
diff
changeset
|
4541 You can use the CTRL-G and CTRL-T keys to move to the next and |
bdd7fc1a38c0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc08328821a2c11e33dfb1980332e4923ec64fca
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10244
diff
changeset
|
4542 previous match. |c_CTRL-G| |c_CTRL-T| |
1521 | 4543 When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about |
4544 half a second. With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the | |
4545 match may not be found. This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you | |
4546 are typing the pattern. | |
17 | 4547 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'. |
12968 | 4548 When 'hlsearch' is on, all matched strings are highlighted too while |
4549 typing a search command. See also: 'hlsearch'. | |
14519 | 4550 If you don't want to turn 'hlsearch' on, but want to highlight all |
4551 matches while searching, you can turn on and off 'hlsearch' with | |
4552 autocmd. Example: > | |
12720
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4553 augroup vimrc-incsearch-highlight |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4554 autocmd! |
12744
0c704288ced4
patch 8.0.1250: 'hlsearch' highlighting not removed after incsearch
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12720
diff
changeset
|
4555 autocmd CmdlineEnter /,\? :set hlsearch |
0c704288ced4
patch 8.0.1250: 'hlsearch' highlighting not removed after incsearch
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12720
diff
changeset
|
4556 autocmd CmdlineLeave /,\? :set nohlsearch |
12720
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4557 augroup END |
37c384802df4
patch 8.0.1238: incremental search only shows one match
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12608
diff
changeset
|
4558 < |
772 | 4559 CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match |
2302
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4560 to the command line. If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4561 command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is |
488be8cbe19c
Make CTRL-L in command line mode respect 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase'. (Martin
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2301
diff
changeset
|
4562 converted to lowercase. |
772 | 4563 CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current |
4564 match, excluding the characters that were already typed. | |
7 | 4565 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
4566 | |
4567 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'* | |
4568 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "") | |
4569 local to buffer | |
4570 {not in Vi} | |
4571 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4572 or |+eval| features} | |
4573 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line. | |
4574 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and | |
4575 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option. | |
4576 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and | |
2833 | 4577 'smartindent' indenting. When 'lisp' is set, this option is |
4578 overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm. | |
7 | 4579 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting. |
4580 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for | |
534 | 4581 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line |
7 | 4582 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around). |
4583 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It | |
4584 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is | |
4585 used for the indent). | |
4586 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()| | |
4587 and |lispindent()|. | |
4588 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must | |
4589 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the | |
4590 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved. | |
4591 Normally this option would be set to call a function: > | |
4592 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent() | |
4593 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains | |
4594 "msg". | |
634 | 4595 See |indent-expression|. |
11160 | 4596 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 4597 |
3682 | 4598 The expression will be evaluated in the |sandbox| when set from a |
4599 modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 4600 |
4601 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
4602 evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|. | |
4603 | |
4604 | |
7 | 4605 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'* |
4606 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e") | |
4607 local to buffer | |
4608 {not in Vi} | |
4609 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent| | |
4610 feature} | |
4611 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of | |
4612 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty. | |
4613 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|. | |
4614 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|. | |
4615 | |
4616 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'* | |
4617 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off) | |
4618 local to buffer | |
4619 {not in Vi} | |
4620 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and | |
1621 | 4621 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending |
4622 on the typed text. If the typed text contains a lowercase letter | |
4623 where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made | |
4624 lowercase. If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match | |
4625 has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter, | |
4626 and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase. | |
4627 With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is. | |
7 | 4628 |
4629 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'* | |
4630 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off) | |
4631 global | |
4632 {not in Vi} | |
4633 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful | |
4634 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|. | |
4635 These Insert mode commands will be useful: | |
4636 - Use the cursor keys to move around. | |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
4637 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|. When |
7 | 4638 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off. |
4639 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished. | |
4640 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use | |
477 | 4641 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor |
4642 left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L| | |
7 | 4643 |
4644 These items change when 'insertmode' is set: | |
4645 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode. | |
4646 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps. | |
4647 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode. | |
4648 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted. | |
4649 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z* | |
4650 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like | |
4651 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same | |
4652 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set. | |
4653 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used. | |
4654 | |
4655 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
4656 | |
4657 *'isfname'* *'isf'* | |
4658 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4659 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,=" | |
4660 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:" | |
4661 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~" | |
4662 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=" | |
4663 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=") | |
4664 global | |
4665 {not in Vi} | |
4666 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and | |
4667 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in | |
10 | 4668 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|. |
7 | 4669 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the |
4670 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. | |
4671 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well. | |
1621 | 4672 Think twice before adding white space to this option. Although a |
4673 space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim | |
4674 doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion. | |
4675 It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'. | |
7 | 4676 |
4677 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to | |
4678 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit | |
4679 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special | |
4680 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file | |
4681 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The | |
4682 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for | |
4683 cmd.exe. | |
4684 | |
4685 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas. | |
10 | 4686 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two |
4687 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a | |
7 | 4688 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does |
4689 not work for digits). Example: | |
4690 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range | |
4691 128 to 140 and '#' to 43) | |
4692 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range | |
4693 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left | |
4694 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is | |
4695 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the | |
4696 option or the end of a range. Example: | |
4697 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^') | |
4698 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE | |
4699 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z, | |
4700 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples: | |
4701 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower | |
1621 | 4702 case ASCII letters. |
7 | 4703 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character. |
4704 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is | |
4705 expected. Example: | |
4706 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore. | |
4707 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example: | |
4708 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding | |
4709 comma, plus <Tab>. | |
4710 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
4711 | |
4712 *'isident'* *'isi'* | |
4713 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: | |
4714 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4715 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255") | |
4716 global | |
4717 {not in Vi} | |
4718 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers. | |
4719 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a | |
4720 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a | |
233 | 4721 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this |
14864 | 4722 option. For '@' only characters up to 255 are used. |
7 | 4723 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding |
10 | 4724 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to |
7 | 4725 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead. |
4726 | |
4727 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'* | |
4728 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32: | |
4729 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235" | |
4730 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255" | |
4731 Vi default: "@,48-57,_") | |
4732 local to buffer | |
4733 {not in Vi} | |
4734 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands: | |
10 | 4735 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See |
14864 | 4736 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For '@' |
4737 characters above 255 check the "word" character class. | |
4738 For C programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>". | |
7 | 4739 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except |
4740 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that | |
4741 command). | |
4742 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included. | |
7687
61354fabf8a2
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b8060fe862f684b591f9ac679eac5b2594d6c5a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7538
diff
changeset
|
4743 This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax |
61354fabf8a2
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b8060fe862f684b591f9ac679eac5b2594d6c5a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7538
diff
changeset
|
4744 uses |:syn-iskeyword|. |
7 | 4745 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
4746 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
4747 | |
4748 *'isprint'* *'isp'* | |
4749 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh: | |
4750 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255") | |
4751 global | |
4752 {not in Vi} | |
4753 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the | |
4754 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from | |
4755 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly, | |
4756 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See | |
4757 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. | |
4758 | |
4759 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters: | |
4760 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_" | |
4761 32 - 126 always single characters | |
4762 127 "^?" | |
4763 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_" | |
4764 160 - 254 "| " - "|~" | |
4765 255 "~?" | |
4766 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are | |
4767 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte. | |
4768 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are | |
4769 displayed as <xx>. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4770 The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
4771 |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 4772 |
4773 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the | |
4774 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character | |
4775 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a | |
4776 replacement character will be shown. | |
4777 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>. | |
4778 There is no option to specify these characters. | |
4779 | |
4780 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'* | |
4781 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on) | |
4782 global | |
4783 {not in Vi} | |
4784 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command. | |
4785 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'. | |
4786 Otherwise only one space is inserted. | |
4787 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
4788 | |
4789 *'key'* | |
4790 'key' string (default "") | |
4791 local to buffer | |
4792 {not in Vi} | |
2283
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4793 {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| |
7e1bd501306d
Mainly documentation updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2265
diff
changeset
|
4794 feature} |
7 | 4795 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer. |
2180
f60a0c9cbe6c
Add the blowfish encryption patch from Mohsin Ahmed. Needs more work.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2178
diff
changeset
|
4796 See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'. |
7 | 4797 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed |
4798 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: > | |
4799 :set key= | |
4800 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or | |
4801 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't | |
4802 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it, | |
4803 be careful not to make a typing error! | |
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4804 You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is |
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
4805 enabled. When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars). |
7 | 4806 |
4807 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544* | |
4808 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "") | |
4809 local to buffer | |
4810 {not in Vi} | |
4811 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap| | |
4812 feature} | |
4813 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|. | |
4814 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of | |
4815 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective. | |
4816 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1 | |
36 | 4817 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4818 |
4819 *'keymodel'* *'km'* | |
4820 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "") | |
4821 global | |
4822 {not in Vi} | |
4823 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys | |
4824 can do. These values can be used: | |
4825 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either | |
4826 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being | |
4827 present in 'selectmode'). | |
4828 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection. | |
4829 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>, | |
4830 <PageUp> and <PageDown>. | |
4831 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
4832 | |
4833 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'* | |
4834 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help", | |
9098
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4835 VMS: "help") |
7 | 4836 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
4837 {not in Vi} | |
4838 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are | |
4839 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal | |
4840 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty | |
4841 value did this, which is now deprecated.) | |
9098
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4842 When the first character is ":", the command is invoked as a Vim |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4843 Ex command prefixed with [count]. |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4844 When "man", "man -s" or an Ex command is used, Vim will automatically |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4845 translate a count for the "K" command and pass it as the first |
0d52ddff8db4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/2ff8b64679242e73248774a388d54931c9ce49bd
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9097
diff
changeset
|
4846 argument. For "man -s" the "-s" is removed when there is no count. |
7 | 4847 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
4848 Example: > | |
4849 :set keywordprg=man\ -s | |
4850 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
4851 security reasons. | |
4852 | |
4853 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358* | |
4854 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "") | |
4855 global | |
4856 {not in Vi} | |
4857 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4858 feature} | |
4859 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language | |
10 | 4860 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
4861 inserted directly. When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes |
7 | 4862 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning |
4863 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to | |
4864 be able to execute Normal mode commands. | |
4865 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are | |
4866 mapped in Insert mode. | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4867 Also consider resetting 'langremap' to avoid 'langmap' applies to |
6369 | 4868 characters resulting from a mapping. |
5908 | 4869 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
4870 security reasons. | |
7 | 4871 |
699 | 4872 Example (for Greek, in UTF-8): *greek* > |
4873 :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz | |
7 | 4874 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): > |
4875 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ | |
4876 < | |
4877 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each | |
4878 part can be in one of two forms: | |
4879 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately | |
4880 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC". | |
4881 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to" | |
4882 characters. Example: "abc;ABC" | |
4883 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE" | |
4884 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are | |
4885 ";", ',' and backslash itself. | |
4886 | |
4887 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch | |
4888 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will | |
4889 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the | |
4890 langmap mappings) in the following cases: | |
4891 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings) | |
4892 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R | |
4893 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings | |
4894 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by | |
4895 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time | |
4896 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings. | |
4897 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time! | |
4898 | |
4899 *'langmenu'* *'lm'* | |
4900 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "") | |
4901 global | |
4902 {not in Vi} | |
4903 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and | |
4904 |+multi_lang| features} | |
4905 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded | |
4906 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': > | |
4907 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim" | |
4908 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no | |
4909 matter what $LANG is set to: > | |
4910 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1 | |
4911 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used. | |
36 | 4912 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 4913 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use |
4914 the English menus: > | |
4915 :set langmenu=none | |
4916 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype | |
4917 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting | |
4918 this option has no effect. But you could do this: > | |
4919 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim | |
4920 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1 | |
4921 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim | |
4922 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself! | |
4923 | |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
4924 *'langnoremap'* *'lnr'* *'nolangnoremap'* *'nolnr'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
4925 'langnoremap' 'lnr' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
6339 | 4926 global |
4927 {not in Vi} | |
4928 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| | |
4929 feature} | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4930 This is just like 'langremap' but with the value inverted. It only |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4931 exists for backwards compatibility. When setting 'langremap' then |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4932 'langnoremap' is set to the inverted value, and the other way around. |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4933 |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4934 *'langremap'* *'lrm'* *'nolangremap'* *'nolrm'* |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4935 'langremap' 'lrm' boolean (default on, reset in |defaults.vim|) |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4936 global |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4937 {not in Vi} |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4938 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap| |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4939 feature} |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4940 When off, setting 'langmap' does not apply to characters resulting from |
6339 | 4941 a mapping. This basically means, if you noticed that setting |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4942 'langmap' disables some of your mappings, try resetting this option. |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
4943 This option defaults to on for backwards compatibility. Set it off if |
6339 | 4944 that works for you to avoid mappings to break. |
4945 | |
7 | 4946 *'laststatus'* *'ls'* |
4947 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1) | |
4948 global | |
4949 {not in Vi} | |
4950 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a | |
4951 status line: | |
4952 0: never | |
4953 1: only if there are at least two windows | |
4954 2: always | |
4955 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several | |
4956 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line| | |
4957 | |
4958 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'* | |
4959 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off) | |
4960 global | |
4961 {not in Vi} | |
4962 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while | |
4963 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been | |
10 | 4964 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an |
7 | 4965 update use |:redraw|. |
4966 | |
4967 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'* | |
4968 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off) | |
4969 local to window | |
4970 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
4971 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 4972 feature} |
6009 | 4973 If on, Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather |
7 | 4974 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike |
4975 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file, | |
6009 | 4976 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. |
4977 If 'breakindent' is set, line is visually indented. Then, the value | |
4978 of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines. This option | |
6026 | 4979 is not used when the 'wrap' option is off. |
7 | 4980 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed |
4981 with the right amount of white space. | |
4982 | |
4983 *'lines'* *E593* | |
4984 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height) | |
4985 global | |
4986 Number of lines of the Vim window. | |
4987 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the | |
161 | 4988 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|. |
7 | 4989 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this |
4990 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want | |
4991 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file. | |
4992 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can | |
4993 use this command to get the tallest window possible: > | |
4994 :set lines=999 | |
571 | 4995 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000. |
9887
b4da19b7539f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/dc1f1645cb495fa6bfbe216d7359f23539a0e25d
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9877
diff
changeset
|
4996 If you get fewer lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option. |
7 | 4997 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical |
4998 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up. | |
4999 | |
5000 *'linespace'* *'lsp'* | |
5001 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI) | |
5002 global | |
5003 {not in Vi} | |
5004 {only in the GUI} | |
5005 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font | |
5006 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other. | |
5007 When non-zero there is room for underlining. | |
180 | 5008 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have |
5009 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set | |
5010 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems | |
5011 though! | |
7 | 5012 |
5013 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'* | |
5014 'lisp' boolean (default off) | |
5015 local to buffer | |
5016 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
5017 feature} | |
5018 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for | |
5019 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with | |
5020 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p' | |
5021 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or | |
5022 better. Also see 'lispwords'. | |
5023 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the | |
5024 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than | |
5025 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty. | |
5026 This option is not used when 'paste' is set. | |
5027 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently} | |
5028 | |
5029 *'lispwords'* *'lw'* | |
5030 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long) | |
5712 | 5031 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 5032 {not in Vi} |
5033 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent| | |
5034 feature} | |
5035 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting. | |
5036 |'lisp'| | |
5037 | |
5038 *'list'* *'nolist'* | |
5039 'list' boolean (default off) | |
5040 local to window | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5041 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5042 line. Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5043 trailing blanks. Further changed by the 'listchars' option. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5044 |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5045 The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5046 occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode. To get this cursor |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5047 position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: > |
5161
f7add3891e95
Updated runtime files. Fix NL translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
5146
diff
changeset
|
5048 :set list lcs=tab:\ \ |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5049 < |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5050 Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5051 or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for |
7 | 5052 changing the way tabs are displayed. |
5053 | |
5054 *'listchars'* *'lcs'* | |
5055 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$") | |
5056 global | |
5057 {not in Vi} | |
2458 | 5058 Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command. It is a |
5059 comma separated list of string settings. | |
6777 | 5060 *lcs-eol* |
7 | 5061 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When |
5062 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the | |
5063 line. | |
6777 | 5064 *lcs-tab* |
1263 | 5065 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a tab. The first |
7 | 5066 char is used once. The second char is repeated to |
1263 | 5067 fill the space that the tab normally occupies. |
5068 "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as | |
5069 ">---". When omitted, a tab is show as ^I. | |
6777 | 5070 *lcs-space* |
5071 space:c Character to show for a space. When omitted, spaces | |
5072 are left blank. | |
5073 *lcs-trail* | |
10 | 5074 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted, |
6777 | 5075 trailing spaces are blank. Overrides the "space" |
5076 setting for trailing spaces. | |
5077 *lcs-extends* | |
7 | 5078 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is |
5079 off and the line continues beyond the right of the | |
5080 screen. | |
6777 | 5081 *lcs-precedes* |
7 | 5082 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap' |
5083 is off and there is text preceding the character | |
5084 visible in the first column. | |
6777 | 5085 *lcs-conceal* |
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
5086 conceal:c Character to show in place of concealed text, when |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
5087 'conceallevel' is set to 1. |
6777 | 5088 *lcs-nbsp* |
6801 | 5089 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space character |
5090 (0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F). Left blank when | |
5091 omitted. | |
7 | 5092 |
10 | 5093 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can |
7 | 5094 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable |
819 | 5095 characters are allowed. All characters must be single width. |
7 | 5096 |
5097 Examples: > | |
5098 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:- | |
12 | 5099 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:% |
7 | 5100 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:< |
5101 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and | |
6777 | 5102 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "space", "tab" and "trail". |
1152 | 5103 |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey| |
7 | 5104 |
5105 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'* | |
5106 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on) | |
5107 global | |
5108 {not in Vi} | |
5109 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|. | |
5110 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading | |
5111 of plugins. | |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
5112 Note that using the "-u NONE", "-u DEFAULTS" and "--noplugin" command |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
5113 line arguments reset this option. See |-u| and |--noplugin|. |
7 | 5114 |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5115 *'luadll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5116 'luadll' string (default depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5117 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5118 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5119 {only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5120 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5121 Specifies the name of the Lua shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5122 DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
5123 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5124 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5125 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
5126 |
842 | 5127 *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'* |
5128 'macatsui' boolean (default on) | |
5129 global | |
5130 {only available in Mac GUI version} | |
5131 This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly. When set | |
5132 and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used. When | |
5133 not set ATSUI text drawing is not used. Switch this option off when | |
5134 you experience drawing problems. In a future version the problems may | |
5135 be solved and this option becomes obsolete. Therefore use this method | |
5136 to unset it: > | |
5137 if exists('&macatsui') | |
5138 set nomacatsui | |
5139 endif | |
1152 | 5140 < Another option to check if you have drawing problems is |
5141 'termencoding'. | |
5142 | |
7 | 5143 *'magic'* *'nomagic'* |
5144 'magic' boolean (default on) | |
5145 global | |
5146 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns. | |
5147 See |pattern|. | |
10140
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5148 WARNING: Switching this option off most likely breaks plugins! That |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5149 is because many patterns assume it's on and will fail when it's off. |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5150 Only switch it off when working with old Vi scripts. In any other |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5151 situation write patterns that work when 'magic' is on. Include "\M" |
b11ceef7116e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/64d8e25bf6efe5f18b032563521c3ce278c316ab
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10027
diff
changeset
|
5152 when you want to |/\M|. |
7 | 5153 |
5154 *'makeef'* *'mef'* | |
5155 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "") | |
5156 global | |
5157 {not in Vi} | |
5158 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
5159 feature} | |
5160 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|) | |
5161 and the |:grep| command. | |
5162 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used. | |
5163 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name | |
5164 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an | |
5165 existing file. | |
5166 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that. | |
5167 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5168 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
5169 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5170 security reasons. | |
5171 | |
11063
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5172 *'makeencoding'* *'menc'* |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5173 'makeencoding' 'menc' string (default "") |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5174 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5175 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5176 feature} |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5177 {not in Vi} |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5178 Encoding used for reading the output of external commands. When empty, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5179 encoding is not converted. |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5180 This is used for `:make`, `:lmake`, `:grep`, `:lgrep`, `:grepadd`, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5181 `:lgrepadd`, `:cfile`, `:cgetfile`, `:caddfile`, `:lfile`, `:lgetfile`, |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5182 and `:laddfile`. |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5183 |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5184 This would be mostly useful when you use MS-Windows and set 'encoding' |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5185 to "utf-8". If |+iconv| is enabled and GNU libiconv is used, setting |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5186 'makeencoding' to "char" has the same effect as setting to the system |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5187 locale encoding. Example: > |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5188 :set encoding=utf-8 |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5189 :set makeencoding=char " system locale is used |
e71d3bdf3bc3
patch 8.0.0420: text garbled when the system encoding differs from 'encoding'
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11062
diff
changeset
|
5190 < |
7 | 5191 *'makeprg'* *'mp'* |
5192 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS") | |
5193 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5194 {not in Vi} | |
1152 | 5195 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
5196 This option may contain '%' and '#' characters (see |:_%| and |:_#|), |
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
5197 which are expanded to the current and alternate file name. Use |::S| |
5690 | 5198 to escape file names in case they contain special characters. |
1152 | 5199 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| |
5200 about including spaces and backslashes. | |
5201 Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for | |
5202 the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter called | |
5203 "myfilter" do it like this: > | |
7 | 5204 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter |
5205 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify | |
5206 where the arguments will be included, for example: > | |
5207 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*} | |
5208 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5209 security reasons. | |
5210 | |
5211 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'* | |
5212 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]") | |
5213 local to buffer | |
5214 {not in Vi} | |
5215 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the | |
4073 | 5216 other. |
5217 Only character pairs are allowed that are different, thus you cannot | |
5218 jump between two double quotes. | |
5219 The characters must be separated by a colon. | |
1152 | 5220 The pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and |
5221 '>' (HTML): > | |
7 | 5222 :set mps+=<:> |
5223 | |
5224 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an | |
5225 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: > | |
5226 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:; | |
5227 | |
5228 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in | |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
5229 the $VIMRUNTIME/pack/dist/opt/matchit directory. |add-local-help| |
7 | 5230 |
5231 *'matchtime'* *'mat'* | |
5232 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5) | |
5233 global | |
5234 {not in Vi}{in Nvi} | |
5235 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is | |
5236 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that | |
5237 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi. | |
5238 | |
714 | 5239 *'maxcombine'* *'mco'* |
5240 'maxcombine' 'mco' number (default 2) | |
5241 global | |
5242 {not in Vi} | |
5243 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
5244 feature} | |
5245 The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying. | |
5246 Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8". | |
5247 The default is OK for most languages. Hebrew may require 4. | |
5248 Maximum value is 6. | |
5249 Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more | |
5250 combining characters, you just can't see them. Use |g8| or |ga|. | |
5251 See |mbyte-combining|. | |
5252 | |
7 | 5253 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'* |
5254 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100) | |
5255 global | |
5256 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5257 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
1152 | 5258 feature} |
7 | 5259 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally |
5260 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with | |
5261 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use | |
5262 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted. | |
10498
883396809b45
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/bc2eada5424bff06f7eb77c032ecc067da52b846
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10449
diff
changeset
|
5263 Increasing this limit above 200 also changes the maximum for Ex |
14006 | 5264 command recursion, see |E169|. |
7 | 5265 See also |:function|. |
5266 | |
5267 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223* | |
5268 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000) | |
5269 global | |
5270 {not in Vi} | |
5271 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a | |
5272 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like | |
5273 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg", | |
5274 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also | |
5275 |key-mapping|. | |
5276 | |
5277 *'maxmem'* *'mm'* | |
5278 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system | |
5279 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
5280 available) | |
5281 global | |
5282 {not in Vi} | |
5283 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this | |
5284 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause | |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5285 other memory to be freed. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5286 The maximum usable value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5287 limit. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5288 The value is ignored when 'swapfile' is off. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5289 Also see 'maxmemtot'. |
7 | 5290 |
189 | 5291 *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'* |
5292 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000) | |
5293 global | |
5294 {not in Vi} | |
5295 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5296 The maximum value is about 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. |
189 | 5297 *E363* |
1152 | 5298 When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly |
5299 behaves like CTRL-C was typed. | |
189 | 5300 Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very |
5301 inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern | |
5302 "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better. | |
14298
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5303 Might also happen on redraw, when syntax rules try to match a complex |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5304 text structure. |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5305 Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit, in |
4a588e3afd4a
Update runtime files, add Danish translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14249
diff
changeset
|
5306 which case you get an "Out of memory" error instead. |
189 | 5307 |
7 | 5308 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'* |
5309 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system | |
5310 dependent) or half the amount of memory | |
5311 available) | |
5312 global | |
5313 {not in Vi} | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5314 Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together. |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5315 The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte). Use this to work |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5316 without a limit. |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5317 On 64 bit machines higher values might work. But hey, do you really |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5318 need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing? Keep in mind that text is |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
5319 stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyway. We do |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
5320 need the memory to store undo info. |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5321 Buffers with 'swapfile' off still count to the total amount of memory |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
5322 used. |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
5323 Also see 'maxmem'. |
7 | 5324 |
5325 *'menuitems'* *'mis'* | |
5326 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25) | |
5327 global | |
5328 {not in Vi} | |
5329 {not available when compiled without the |+menu| | |
5330 feature} | |
5331 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are | |
5332 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this | |
5333 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first. | |
5334 | |
484 | 5335 *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'* |
5336 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500") | |
5337 global | |
5338 {not in Vi} | |
5339 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
5340 feature} | |
5341 Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the | |
5342 word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but | |
5343 it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used | |
5344 per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why | |
5345 this tuning is complicated. | |
5346 | |
5347 There are three numbers, separated by commas: | |
5348 {start},{inc},{added} | |
5349 | |
5350 For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start} | |
5351 gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any | |
5352 compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of | |
5353 memory that is available to Vim. | |
5354 | |
5355 When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the | |
5356 amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another | |
5357 compression is done. A low number means compression is done after | |
5358 less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory | |
5359 will be allocated. | |
5360 | |
5361 After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before | |
5362 the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra | |
5363 amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller | |
5364 chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's | |
5365 slower. | |
5366 | |
5367 The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and | |
5368 Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If | |
5369 you have 1 Gbyte you could use: > | |
5370 :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800 | |
5371 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some | |
5372 languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to. | |
5373 | |
7 | 5374 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'* |
1111 | 5375 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on (off for root), |
5376 Vi default: off) | |
7 | 5377 local to buffer |
5378 *'modelines'* *'mls'* | |
5379 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5) | |
5380 global | |
5381 {not in Vi} | |
5382 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is | |
5383 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero | |
5384 no lines are checked. See |modeline|. | |
5385 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
5386 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5387 | |
5388 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'* | |
5389 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on) | |
5390 local to buffer | |
5391 {not in Vi} *E21* | |
5392 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and | |
5393 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed. | |
10617 | 5394 Can be reset on startup with the |-M| command line argument. |
7 | 5395 |
5396 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'* | |
5397 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off) | |
5398 local to buffer | |
5399 {not in Vi} | |
5400 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set | |
5401 when: | |
5402 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the | |
5403 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the | |
5404 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the | |
5405 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from | |
5406 when it was written. | |
5407 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original | |
5408 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or | |
5409 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original | |
5410 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be | |
5411 reset. | |
8748
b1a19a2f73f0
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4f3f668c8486444e53163c29d2fc79bf47eb3c82
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8629
diff
changeset
|
5412 Similarly for 'eol' and 'bomb'. |
3082 | 5413 This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the |
5414 result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost, | |
5415 FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event. See |gzip-example| for | |
5416 an explanation. | |
7 | 5417 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but |
5418 will be ignored. | |
13437 | 5419 Note that the text may actually be the same, e.g. 'modified' is set |
5420 when using "rA" on an "A". | |
7 | 5421 |
5422 *'more'* *'nomore'* | |
5423 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
5424 global | |
5425 {not in Vi} | |
5426 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get | |
5427 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the | |
5428 listing continues until finished. | |
5429 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
5430 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
5431 | |
5432 *'mouse'* *E538* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5433 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5434 set to "a" in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 5435 global |
5436 {not in Vi} | |
5437 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals | |
1621 | 5438 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with |
5439 sysmouse and Linux console with gpm). For using the mouse in the | |
5440 GUI, see |gui-mouse|. | |
7 | 5441 The mouse can be enabled for different modes: |
12826 | 5442 n Normal mode and Terminal modes |
7 | 5443 v Visual mode |
5444 i Insert mode | |
5445 c Command-line mode | |
5446 h all previous modes when editing a help file | |
5447 a all previous modes | |
5448 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt | |
14864 | 5449 Normally you would enable the mouse in all five modes with: > |
7 | 5450 :set mouse=a |
5451 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for | |
5452 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor. | |
5453 | |
5454 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|. | |
5455 | |
5456 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the | |
10 | 5457 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of |
7 | 5458 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed. |
5459 Also see the 'clipboard' option. | |
5460 | |
5461 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'* | |
5462 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off) | |
5463 global | |
5464 {not in Vi} | |
5465 {only works in the GUI} | |
5466 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated. | |
5467 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the | |
5468 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the | |
5469 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as | |
5470 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally. | |
5471 | |
5472 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'* | |
5473 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on) | |
5474 global | |
5475 {not in Vi} | |
5476 {only works in the GUI} | |
5477 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed. | |
5478 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved. | |
5479 | |
5480 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'* | |
5481 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32) | |
5482 global | |
5483 {not in Vi} | |
5484 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what | |
5485 the right mouse button is used for: | |
5486 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works | |
5487 like in an xterm. | |
5488 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left | |
5489 mouse button extends a selection. This works like | |
233 | 5490 with Microsoft Windows. |
7 | 5491 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the |
5492 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the | |
5493 selected operation will act upon the clicked object. | |
5494 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will | |
233 | 5495 be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of |
7 | 5496 course, that right clicking outside a selection will |
5497 end Visual mode. | |
5498 Overview of what button does what for each model: | |
5499 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~ | |
5500 left click place cursor place cursor | |
5501 left drag start selection start selection | |
5502 shift-left search word extend selection | |
5503 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor) | |
5504 right drag extend selection - | |
5505 middle click paste paste | |
5506 | |
5507 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu. | |
5508 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|. | |
13437 | 5509 In a terminal the popup menu works if Vim is compiled with the |
5510 |+insert_expand| option. | |
7 | 5511 |
5512 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings. | |
5513 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless | |
5514 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly). | |
5515 | |
5516 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
5517 | |
5518 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547* | |
5519 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross, | |
233 | 5520 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow") |
7 | 5521 global |
5522 {not in Vi} | |
5523 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape| | |
5524 feature} | |
5525 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in | |
5526 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much | |
5527 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list | |
5528 and an argument-list: | |
5529 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,.. | |
5530 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations: | |
5531 In a normal window: ~ | |
5532 n Normal mode | |
5533 v Visual mode | |
5534 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v', | |
5535 if not specified) | |
5536 o Operator-pending mode | |
5537 i Insert mode | |
5538 r Replace mode | |
5539 | |
5540 Others: ~ | |
5541 c appending to the command-line | |
5542 ci inserting in the command-line | |
5543 cr replacing in the command-line | |
5544 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts | |
5545 ml idem, but cursor in the last line | |
5546 e any mode, pointer below last window | |
5547 s any mode, pointer on a status line | |
5548 sd any mode, while dragging a status line | |
5549 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line | |
5550 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line | |
5551 a everywhere | |
5552 | |
5553 The shape is one of the following: | |
5554 avail name looks like ~ | |
5555 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer | |
5556 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!) | |
5557 w x beam I-beam | |
5558 w x updown up-down sizing arrows | |
5559 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows | |
5560 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer | |
5561 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer | |
5562 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing | |
5563 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing | |
5564 x crosshair like a big thin + | |
5565 x hand1 black hand | |
5566 x hand2 white hand | |
5567 x pencil what you write with | |
5568 x question big ? | |
5569 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up | |
5570 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up | |
5571 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h) | |
5572 | |
5573 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32, | |
5574 x for X11. | |
5575 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse | |
5576 pointer. | |
5577 | |
5578 Example: > | |
5579 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no | |
5580 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and | |
5581 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since | |
5582 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.) | |
5583 | |
5584 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'* | |
5585 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500) | |
5586 global | |
5587 {not in Vi} | |
5588 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum | |
5589 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be | |
5590 recognized as a multi click. | |
5591 | |
12608
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5592 *'mzschemedll'* |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5593 'mzschemedll' string (default depends on the build) |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5594 global |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5595 {not in Vi} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5596 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5597 feature} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5598 Specifies the name of the MzScheme shared library. The default is |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5599 DYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL which was specified at compile time. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5600 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
12785 | 5601 The value must be set in the |vimrc| script or earlier. In the |
12756
3b26420fc639
Long overdue runtime update.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12744
diff
changeset
|
5602 startup, before the |load-plugins| step. |
12608
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5603 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5604 security reasons. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5605 |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5606 *'mzschemegcdll'* |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5607 'mzschemegcdll' string (default depends on the build) |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5608 global |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5609 {not in Vi} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5610 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme/dyn| |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5611 feature} |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5612 Specifies the name of the MzScheme GC shared library. The default is |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5613 DYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL which was specified at compile time. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5614 The value can be equal to 'mzschemedll' if it includes the GC code. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5615 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5616 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5617 security reasons. |
b390f5003e2f
patch 8.0.1182: cannot see or change mzscheme dll name
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12559
diff
changeset
|
5618 |
14 | 5619 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'* |
5620 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100) | |
5621 global | |
5622 {not in Vi} | |
5623 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme| | |
5624 feature} | |
5625 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads. | |
5626 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling. | |
11160 | 5627 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
5628 is reset. | |
14 | 5629 |
7 | 5630 *'nrformats'* *'nf'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5631 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "bin,octal,hex", |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
5632 set to "bin,hex" in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 5633 local to buffer |
5634 {not in Vi} | |
5635 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the | |
5636 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number | |
5637 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands. | |
625 | 5638 alpha If included, single alphabetical characters will be |
7 | 5639 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5640 letter index a), b), etc. *octal-nrformats* |
625 | 5641 octal If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered |
7 | 5642 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010". |
625 | 5643 hex If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be |
7 | 5644 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
5645 "0x100" results in "0x0ff". | |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5646 bin If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5647 considered to be binary. Example: Using CTRL-X on |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
5648 "0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111". |
7 | 5649 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always |
5650 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not | |
5651 recognized as octal or hex. | |
5652 | |
5653 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'* | |
5654 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off) | |
5655 local to window | |
5656 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is | |
5657 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of | |
5658 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set). | |
13 | 5659 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
5660 number. | |
7 | 5661 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
5662 characters are put before the number. | |
3445 | 5663 See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for |
5664 the number. | |
4780 | 5665 *number_relativenumber* |
5666 The 'relativenumber' option changes the displayed number to be | |
5667 relative to the cursor. Together with 'number' there are these | |
5668 four combinations (cursor in line 3): | |
5669 | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
5670 'nonu' 'nu' 'nonu' 'nu' |
4780 | 5671 'nornu' 'nornu' 'rnu' 'rnu' |
5672 | |
5673 |apple | 1 apple | 2 apple | 2 apple | |
5674 |pear | 2 pear | 1 pear | 1 pear | |
5675 |nobody | 3 nobody | 0 nobody |3 nobody | |
5676 |there | 4 there | 1 there | 1 there | |
7 | 5677 |
13 | 5678 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'* |
5679 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8) | |
5680 local to window | |
14 | 5681 {not in Vi} |
5682 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak| | |
5683 feature} | |
13 | 5684 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5685 when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5686 with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5687 the text, there is one less character for the number itself. |
13 | 5688 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5689 fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5690 rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5691 is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5692 up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used. |
13 | 5693 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10. |
11160 | 5694 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
5695 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
13 | 5696 |
523 | 5697 *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'* |
5698 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty) | |
502 | 5699 local to buffer |
5700 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5701 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| |
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5702 or |+insert_expand| features} |
623 | 5703 This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni |
5704 completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O| | |
648 | 5705 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is |
5706 invoked and what it should return. | |
1004 | 5707 This option is usually set by a filetype plugin: |
859 | 5708 |:filetype-plugin-on| |
3682 | 5709 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5710 security reasons. | |
502 | 5711 |
5712 | |
1152 | 5713 *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'* |
1004 | 5714 'opendevice' 'odev' boolean (default off) |
5715 global | |
5716 {not in Vi} | |
5717 {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
5718 Enable reading and writing from devices. This may get Vim stuck on a | |
5719 device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O. Therefore | |
5720 it is off by default. | |
5721 Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also | |
5722 result in editing a device. | |
5723 | |
5724 | |
593 | 5725 *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'* |
5726 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty) | |
5727 global | |
5728 {not in Vi} | |
5729 This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator. | |
5730 See |:map-operator| for more info and an example. | |
5731 | |
5732 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5733 security reasons. | |
5734 | |
5735 | |
2908 | 5736 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* |
5737 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (default: "") | |
7 | 5738 local to buffer |
5739 {not in Vi} | |
2908 | 5740 This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed. |
5741 | |
7 | 5742 |
8182
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5743 *'packpath'* *'pp'* |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5744 'packpath' 'pp' string (default: see 'runtimepath') |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5745 {not in Vi} |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5746 Directories used to find packages. See |packages|. |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5747 |
95d59081580f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/f6fee0e2d4341c0c2f5339c1268e5877fafd07cf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8148
diff
changeset
|
5748 |
7 | 5749 *'paragraphs'* *'para'* |
1564 | 5750 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp") |
7 | 5751 global |
5752 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs | |
5753 of two letters (see |object-motions|). | |
5754 | |
5755 *'paste'* *'nopaste'* | |
5756 'paste' boolean (default off) | |
5757 global | |
5758 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 5759 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy |
5760 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid | |
7 | 5761 unexpected effects. |
5762 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim | |
10 | 5763 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim |
7 | 5764 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste' |
5765 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the | |
5766 mouse clicks itself. | |
148 | 5767 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in |
5768 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting | |
5769 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button | |
5770 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping. | |
7 | 5771 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on): |
5772 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled | |
5773 - abbreviations are disabled | |
5774 - 'autoindent' is reset | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5775 - 'expandtab' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5776 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty |
7 | 5777 - 'revins' is reset |
5778 - 'ruler' is reset | |
5779 - 'showmatch' is reset | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5780 - 'smartindent' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5781 - 'smarttab' is reset |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5782 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0 |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5783 - 'textwidth' is set to 0 |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5784 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0 |
7 | 5785 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled: |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5786 - 'cindent' |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
5787 - 'indentexpr' |
7 | 5788 - 'lisp' |
5789 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is | |
5790 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the | |
5791 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to | |
5792 set the 'paste' option again. | |
5793 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to | |
5794 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on. | |
5795 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect. | |
5796 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use | |
5797 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key. | |
5798 | |
5799 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'* | |
5800 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "") | |
5801 global | |
5802 {not in Vi} | |
5803 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste' | |
5804 option. This is like specifying a mapping: > | |
5805 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR> | |
5806 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'. | |
5807 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set. | |
5808 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in | |
5809 Command-line mode. | |
5810 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However, | |
5811 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do | |
5812 this: > | |
5813 :map <F10> :set paste<CR> | |
5814 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR> | |
5815 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR> | |
5816 :imap <F11> <nop> | |
5817 :set pastetoggle=<F11> | |
5818 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode. | |
5819 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste | |
5820 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key | |
5821 sequence. | |
1621 | 5822 When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies. |
7 | 5823 |
5824 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'* | |
5825 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "") | |
5826 global | |
5827 {not in Vi} | |
5828 {not available when compiled without the |+diff| | |
5829 feature} | |
5830 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate | |
10 | 5831 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|. |
7 | 5832 |
6091
7090d7f160f7
Update runtime files. Add vroom file support.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
6032
diff
changeset
|
5833 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E205* *E206* |
7 | 5834 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "") |
5835 global | |
5836 {not in Vi} | |
5837 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used | |
5838 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a | |
5839 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a | |
5840 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the | |
5841 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option | |
5842 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like | |
13100
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5843 ".orig" or ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5844 (Detail: The backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5845 new file has been successfully written, that's why it must be possible |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5846 to write a backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an |
656ab57d1ddc
update a few runtime files
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13051
diff
changeset
|
5847 empty file is created. |
7 | 5848 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made. |
5849 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the | |
5850 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always | |
5851 recognized as a compressed file. | |
36 | 5852 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 5853 |
3224 | 5854 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854* |
7 | 5855 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,," |
5856 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,," | |
5857 other systems: ".,,") | |
5858 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
5859 {not in Vi} | |
5860 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the | |
1668 | 5861 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands, |
5862 provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not | |
5863 starting with "/", "./" or "../"). The directories in the 'path' | |
5864 option may be relative or absolute. | |
7 | 5865 - Use commas to separate directory names: > |
5866 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include | |
5867 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards | |
5868 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory | |
5869 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: > | |
5870 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space | |
5871 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra | |
5872 backslash: > | |
5873 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma | |
5874 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: > | |
5875 :set path=. | |
5876 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two | |
5877 commas: > | |
5878 :set path=,, | |
5879 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'. | |
5880 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5881 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding | |
5882 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work. | |
1668 | 5883 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and |
5884 ";". See |file-searching| for info and syntax. | |
7 | 5885 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature} |
5886 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: > | |
5887 :set path=.,c:\\include | |
5888 < Or just use '/' instead: > | |
5889 :set path=.,c:/include | |
5890 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as | |
5891 the file! | |
10 | 5892 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly |
7 | 5893 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters. |
5894 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of | |
5895 'path', see |:checkpath|. | |
5896 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
5897 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
5898 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: > | |
5899 :set path-= | |
5900 < To add the current directory use: > | |
5901 :set path+= | |
5902 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the | |
5903 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory | |
5904 names are separated with a semi-colon: > | |
5905 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g') | |
5906 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that | |
5907 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space. | |
5908 | |
12499 | 5909 *'perldll'* |
5910 'perldll' string (default depends on the build) | |
5911 global | |
5912 {not in Vi} | |
5913 {only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn| | |
5914 feature} | |
5915 Specifies the name of the Perl shared library. The default is | |
5916 DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. | |
5917 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
5918 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
5919 security reasons. | |
5920 | |
7 | 5921 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'* |
5922 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off) | |
5923 local to buffer | |
5924 {not in Vi} | |
5925 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the | |
5926 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a | |
5927 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is | |
5928 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option | |
5929 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible | |
5930 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required. | |
1621 | 5931 'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains |
5932 a Tab. | |
7 | 5933 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of |
5934 tabs and spaces. You might not like this. | |
11160 | 5935 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 5936 Also see 'copyindent'. |
5937 Use |:retab| to clean up white space. | |
5938 | |
5939 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'* | |
5940 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12) | |
5941 global | |
5942 {not in Vi} | |
5943 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5944 |+quickfix| features} |
7 | 5945 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated |
5946 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given. | |
5947 | |
5948 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'* | |
5949 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590* | |
5950 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off) | |
5951 local to window | |
5952 {not in Vi} | |
5953 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5954 |+quickfix| features} |
10 | 5955 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option |
7 | 5956 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands |
5957 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc. | |
5958 | |
5959 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'* | |
5960 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty) | |
5961 global | |
5962 {not in Vi} | |
5963 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5964 feature} | |
15 | 5965 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5966 See |pdev-option|. | |
36 | 5967 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
5968 security reasons. | |
15 | 5969 |
5970 *'printencoding'* *'penc'* | |
14864 | 5971 'printencoding' 'penc' string (default empty, except for some systems) |
7 | 5972 global |
5973 {not in Vi} | |
5974 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5975 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5976 Sets the character encoding used when printing. |
5977 See |penc-option|. | |
7 | 5978 |
5979 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'* | |
14864 | 5980 'printexpr' 'pexpr' string (default: see below) |
7 | 5981 global |
5982 {not in Vi} | |
5983 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5984 and |+postscript| features} | |
15 | 5985 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|. |
5986 See |pexpr-option|. | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
5987 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
5988 security reasons. |
15 | 5989 |
5990 *'printfont'* *'pfn'* | |
7 | 5991 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier") |
5992 global | |
5993 {not in Vi} | |
5994 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
5995 feature} | |
15 | 5996 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|. |
5997 See |pfn-option|. | |
7 | 5998 |
5999 *'printheader'* *'pheader'* | |
6000 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N") | |
6001 global | |
6002 {not in Vi} | |
6003 {only available when compiled with the |+printer| | |
6004 feature} | |
15 | 6005 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output. |
6006 See |pheader-option|. | |
6007 | |
6008 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'* | |
6009 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "") | |
6010 global | |
6011 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 6012 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
6013 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 6014 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
6015 See |pmbcs-option|. | |
6016 | |
6017 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'* | |
6018 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "") | |
6019 global | |
6020 {not in Vi} | |
180 | 6021 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|, |
6022 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features} | |
15 | 6023 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|. |
6024 See |pmbfn-option|. | |
7 | 6025 |
6026 *'printoptions'* *'popt'* | |
6027 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "") | |
6028 global | |
6029 {not in Vi} | |
6030 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature} | |
15 | 6031 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|. |
6032 See |popt-option|. | |
6033 | |
168 | 6034 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'* |
6035 'prompt' boolean (default on) | |
6036 global | |
6037 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode. | |
6038 | |
766 | 6039 *'pumheight'* *'ph'* |
6040 'pumheight' 'ph' number (default 0) | |
6041 global | |
6042 {not available when compiled without the | |
6043 |+insert_expand| feature} | |
6044 {not in Vi} | |
853 | 6045 Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for |
6046 Insert mode completion. When zero as much space as available is used. | |
766 | 6047 |ins-completion-menu|. |
6048 | |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6049 *'pumwidth'* *'pw'* |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
6050 'pumwidth' 'pw' number (default 15) |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6051 global |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6052 {not available when compiled without the |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6053 |+insert_expand| feature} |
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6054 {not in Vi} |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
6055 Determines the minimum width to use for the popup menu for Insert mode |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
6056 completion. |ins-completion-menu|. |
13234
6e972d830e13
patch 8.0.1491: the minimum width of the popup menu is hard coded
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13231
diff
changeset
|
6057 |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6058 *'pythondll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
6059 'pythondll' string (default depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6060 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6061 {not in Vi} |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6062 {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6063 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6064 Specifies the name of the Python 2.x shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6065 DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6066 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7228
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6067 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6068 security reasons. |
873eae260c97
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/b4ff518d95aa57c2f8c0568c915035bef849581b
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7218
diff
changeset
|
6069 |
13154
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6070 *'pythonhome'* |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6071 'pythonhome' string (default "") |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6072 global |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6073 {not in Vi} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6074 {only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn| |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6075 feature} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6076 Specifies the name of the Python 2.x home directory. When 'pythonhome' |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6077 and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, PYTHON_HOME, |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6078 which was specified at compile time, will be used for the Python 2.x |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6079 home directory. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6080 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6081 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6082 security reasons. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6083 |
7218
36dc8df8560f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0796c0625fa4b9eb2f47fe8c976b78523924e1fb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7196
diff
changeset
|
6084 *'pythonthreedll'* |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6085 'pythonthreedll' string (default depends on the build) |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6086 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6087 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6088 {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6089 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6090 Specifies the name of the Python 3 shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6091 DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6092 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6093 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6094 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6095 |
13154
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6096 *'pythonthreehome'* |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6097 'pythonthreehome' string (default "") |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6098 global |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6099 {not in Vi} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6100 {only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn| |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6101 feature} |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6102 Specifies the name of the Python 3 home directory. When |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6103 'pythonthreehome' and the PYTHONHOME environment variable are not set, |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6104 PYTHON3_HOME, which was specified at compile time, will be used for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6105 the Python 3 home directory. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6106 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6107 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6108 security reasons. |
53cc7ea77c54
patch 8.0.1451: difficult to set the python home directories properly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13150
diff
changeset
|
6109 |
10722
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6110 *'pyxversion'* *'pyx'* |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6111 'pyxversion' 'pyx' number (default depends on the build) |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6112 global |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6113 {not in Vi} |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6114 {only available when compiled with the |+python| or |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6115 the |+python3| feature} |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6116 Specifies the python version used for pyx* functions and commands |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6117 |python_x|. The default value is as follows: |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6118 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6119 Compiled with Default ~ |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6120 |+python| and |+python3| 0 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6121 only |+python| 2 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6122 only |+python3| 3 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6123 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6124 Available values are 0, 2 and 3. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6125 If 'pyxversion' is 0, it is set to 2 or 3 after the first execution of |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6126 any python2/3 commands or functions. E.g. `:py` sets to 2, and `:py3` |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6127 sets to 3. `:pyx` sets it to 3 if Python 3 is available, otherwise sets |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6128 to 2 if Python 2 is available. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6129 See also: |has-pythonx| |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6130 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6131 If Vim is compiled with only |+python| or |+python3| setting |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6132 'pyxversion' has no effect. The pyx* functions and commands are |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6133 always the same as the compiled version. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6134 |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6135 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6136 security reasons. |
7598ce51bf2a
patch 8.0.0251: not easy to select Python 2 or 3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10617
diff
changeset
|
6137 |
140 | 6138 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'* |
12 | 6139 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\") |
6140 local to buffer | |
6141 {not in Vi} | |
6142 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for | |
6143 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|. | |
6144 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string, | |
6145 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the | |
6146 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string. | |
6147 | |
7 | 6148 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'* |
6149 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off) | |
6150 local to buffer | |
6151 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from | |
6152 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started | |
6153 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view". | |
164 | 6154 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current |
6155 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'. | |
7 | 6156 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is |
164 | 6157 set for the newly edited buffer. |
10617 | 6158 See 'modifiable' for disallowing changes to the buffer. |
7 | 6159 |
1521 | 6160 *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'* |
6161 'redrawtime' 'rdt' number (default 2000) | |
6162 global | |
6163 {not in Vi} | |
6164 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| | |
6165 feature} | |
6166 The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display. This applies to | |
13818
28ac7914b2b6
Update runtime files and translations
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13742
diff
changeset
|
6167 searching for patterns for 'hlsearch', |:match| highlighting and syntax |
11529
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6168 highlighting. |
1521 | 6169 When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further |
11529
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6170 matches will be highlighted. |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6171 For syntax highlighting the time applies per window. When over the |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6172 limit syntax highlighting is disabled until |CTRL-L| is used. |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6173 This is used to avoid that Vim hangs when using a very complicated |
998d2cf59caa
patch 8.0.0647: syntax highlighting can make cause a freeze
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11516
diff
changeset
|
6174 pattern. |
1521 | 6175 |
4681
2eb30f341e8d
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
6176 *'regexpengine'* *'re'* |
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6177 'regexpengine' 're' number (default 0) |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6178 global |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6179 {not in Vi} |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6180 This selects the default regexp engine. |two-engines| |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6181 The possible values are: |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6182 0 automatic selection |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6183 1 old engine |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6184 2 NFA engine |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6185 Note that when using the NFA engine and the pattern contains something |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6186 that is not supported the pattern will not match. This is only useful |
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6187 for debugging the regexp engine. |
6328 | 6188 Using automatic selection enables Vim to switch the engine, if the |
6189 default engine becomes too costly. E.g., when the NFA engine uses too | |
6190 many states. This should prevent Vim from hanging on a combination of | |
6191 a complex pattern with long text. | |
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4358
diff
changeset
|
6192 |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6193 *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'* |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6194 'relativenumber' 'rnu' boolean (default off) |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6195 local to window |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6196 {not in Vi} |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6197 Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of |
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2204
diff
changeset
|
6198 each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6199 precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6200 having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6201 other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6202 When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6203 line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6204 'compatible' isn't set). |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6205 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6206 number. |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6207 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-' |
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6208 characters are put before the number. |
3445 | 6209 See |hl-LineNr| and |hl-CursorLineNr| for the highlighting used for |
6210 the number. | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
6211 |
4780 | 6212 The number in front of the cursor line also depends on the value of |
6213 'number', see |number_relativenumber| for all combinations of the two | |
6214 options. | |
2178
c6f1aa1e9f32
Add 'relativenumber' patch from Markus Heidelberg.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6215 |
7 | 6216 *'remap'* *'noremap'* |
6217 'remap' boolean (default on) | |
6218 global | |
6219 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for | |
6220 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command. | |
717 | 6221 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep |
6222 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with | |
6223 old Vi scripts. | |
7 | 6224 |
6110 | 6225 *'renderoptions'* *'rop'* |
6226 'renderoptions' 'rop' string (default: empty) | |
6227 global | |
6228 {not in Vi} | |
6229 {only available when compiled with GUI and DIRECTX on | |
6230 MS-Windows} | |
6231 Select a text renderer and set its options. The options depend on the | |
6232 renderer. | |
6233 | |
6234 Syntax: > | |
6235 set rop=type:{renderer}(,{name}:{value})* | |
6236 < | |
6237 Currently, only one optional renderer is available. | |
6238 | |
6239 render behavior ~ | |
6240 directx Vim will draw text using DirectX (DirectWrite). It makes | |
6241 drawn glyphs more beautiful than default GDI. | |
6242 It requires 'encoding' is "utf-8", and only works on | |
6243 MS-Windows Vista or newer version. | |
6244 | |
6245 Options: | |
6246 name meaning type value ~ | |
6247 gamma gamma float 1.0 - 2.2 (maybe) | |
6248 contrast enhancedContrast float (unknown) | |
6249 level clearTypeLevel float (unknown) | |
6250 geom pixelGeometry int 0 - 2 (see below) | |
6251 renmode renderingMode int 0 - 6 (see below) | |
6252 taamode textAntialiasMode int 0 - 3 (see below) | |
13150
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6253 scrlines Scroll Lines int (deprecated) |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6254 |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6255 See this URL for detail (except for scrlines): |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6256 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368190.aspx |
6110 | 6257 |
6258 For geom: structure of a device pixel. | |
6259 0 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_FLAT | |
6260 1 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_RGB | |
6261 2 - DWRITE_PIXEL_GEOMETRY_BGR | |
6262 | |
6263 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6264 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368114.aspx |
6110 | 6265 |
6266 For renmode: method of rendering glyphs. | |
6267 0 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_DEFAULT | |
6268 1 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_ALIASED | |
6269 2 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_CLASSIC | |
6270 3 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_GDI_NATURAL | |
6271 4 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL | |
6272 5 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_NATURAL_SYMMETRIC | |
6273 6 - DWRITE_RENDERING_MODE_OUTLINE | |
6274 | |
6275 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6276 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368118.aspx |
6110 | 6277 |
6278 For taamode: antialiasing mode used for drawing text. | |
6279 0 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_DEFAULT | |
6280 1 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_CLEARTYPE | |
6281 2 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_GRAYSCALE | |
6282 3 - D2D1_TEXT_ANTIALIAS_MODE_ALIASED | |
6283 | |
6284 See this URL for detail: | |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6285 https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd368170.aspx |
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6286 |
13150
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6287 For scrlines: |
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6288 This was used for optimizing scrolling behavior, however this |
808625d4b71b
patch 8.0.1449: slow redrawing with DirectX
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13100
diff
changeset
|
6289 is now deprecated. If specified, it is simply ignored. |
6110 | 6290 |
6291 Example: > | |
6292 set encoding=utf-8 | |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6293 set gfn=Ricty_Diminished:h12 |
6110 | 6294 set rop=type:directx |
6295 < | |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6296 If select a raster font (Courier, Terminal or FixedSys which |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6297 have ".fon" extension in file name) to 'guifont', it will be |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6298 drawn by GDI as a fallback. |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6299 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6300 NOTE: It is known that some fonts and options combination |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6301 causes trouble on drawing glyphs. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6302 |
12986
18e6f4addce9
patch 8.0.1369: MS-Windows: drawing underline slow, mFallbackDC not updated
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12971
diff
changeset
|
6303 - 'renmode:5' and 'renmode:6' will not work with some |
12934
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6304 special made fonts (True-Type fonts which includes only |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6305 bitmap glyphs). |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6306 - 'taamode:3' will not work with some vector fonts. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6307 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6308 NOTE: With this option, you can display colored emoji |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6309 (emoticon) in Windows 8.1 or later. To display colored emoji, |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6310 there are some conditions which you should notice. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6311 |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6312 - If your font includes non-colored emoji already, it will |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6313 be used. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6314 - If your font doesn't have emoji, the system chooses an |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6315 alternative symbol font. On Windows 10, "Segoe UI Emoji" |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6316 will be used. |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6317 - When this alternative font didn't have fixed width glyph, |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6318 emoji might be rendered beyond the bounding box of drawing |
2ebc3df65ca2
patch 8.0.1343: MS-Windows: does not show colored emojis
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12930
diff
changeset
|
6319 cell. |
6110 | 6320 |
6321 Other render types are currently not supported. | |
6322 | |
7 | 6323 *'report'* |
6324 'report' number (default 2) | |
6325 global | |
6326 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of | |
6327 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most | |
6328 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0. | |
6329 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used | |
6330 instead of the number of lines. | |
6331 | |
6332 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'* | |
6333 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on) | |
6334 global | |
6335 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version} | |
6336 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also | |
6337 happens when executing external commands. | |
6338 | |
6339 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te' | |
6340 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring: | |
6341 set t_ti= t_te= | |
6342 To enable restoring (for an xterm): | |
6343 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8 | |
6344 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it) | |
6345 | |
6346 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'* | |
6347 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off) | |
6348 global | |
6349 {not in Vi} | |
6350 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6351 feature} | |
6352 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing | |
6353 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_ | |
6354 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6355 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6356 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6357 reset. |
7 | 6358 |
6359 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'* | |
6360 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off) | |
6361 local to window | |
6362 {not in Vi} | |
6363 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6364 feature} | |
6365 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters | |
6366 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left. | |
6367 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that | |
6368 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic. | |
6369 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files | |
6370 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is | |
6371 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left | |
6372 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly | |
6373 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|. | |
6374 | |
2341 | 6375 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* |
7 | 6376 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search") |
6377 local to window | |
6378 {not in Vi} | |
6379 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft| | |
6380 feature} | |
6381 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in | |
6382 right-to-left mode for a group of commands: | |
6383 | |
6384 search "/" and "?" commands | |
6385 | |
6386 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi. | |
6387 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect. | |
6388 | |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6389 *'rubydll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
6390 'rubydll' string (default: depends on the build) |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6391 global |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6392 {not in Vi} |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6393 {only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn| |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6394 feature} |
7528
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6395 Specifies the name of the Ruby shared library. The default is |
53163e4d9e4f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/25e4fcde767084d1a79e0926bc301c92987c0cce
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7477
diff
changeset
|
6396 DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
6397 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7196
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6398 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6399 security reasons. |
42717d048817
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d94464ee294a351ce7b6ba18e8bd3f24f1bef920
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7147
diff
changeset
|
6400 |
7 | 6401 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
6402 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 6403 global |
6404 {not in Vi} | |
6405 {not available when compiled without the | |
6406 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
6407 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a | |
10 | 6408 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed |
7 | 6409 text in the file is shown on the far right: |
6410 Top first line is visible | |
6411 Bot last line is visible | |
6412 All first and last line are visible | |
6413 45% relative position in the file | |
6414 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler. | |
10 | 6415 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the |
7 | 6416 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the |
233 | 6417 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty), |
7 | 6418 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat' |
6419 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of | |
6420 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both | |
6421 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown, | |
6422 separated with a dash. | |
6423 For an empty line "0-1" is shown. | |
6424 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1". | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6425 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
6426 reset. |
7 | 6427 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where |
6428 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|. | |
6429 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6430 | |
6431 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'* | |
6432 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty) | |
6433 global | |
6434 {not in Vi} | |
6435 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
6436 feature} | |
6437 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler | |
6438 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option. | |
692 | 6439 The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'. |
7 | 6440 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15 |
6441 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end. | |
6442 Example: > | |
6443 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%) | |
6444 < | |
6445 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles* | |
6446 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default: | |
6447 Unix: "$HOME/.vim, | |
6448 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6449 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6450 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6451 $HOME/.vim/after" | |
6452 Amiga: "home:vimfiles, | |
6453 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6454 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6455 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6456 home:vimfiles/after" | |
6457 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles, | |
6458 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6459 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6460 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
6461 $HOME/vimfiles/after" | |
6462 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles, | |
6463 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6464 $VIM:vimfiles:after" | |
6465 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles, | |
6466 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6467 Choices:vimfiles/after" | |
6468 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles, | |
6469 $VIM/vimfiles, | |
6470 $VIMRUNTIME, | |
6471 $VIM/vimfiles/after, | |
233 | 6472 sys$login:vimfiles/after") |
7 | 6473 global |
6474 {not in Vi} | |
6475 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime | |
6476 files: | |
6477 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype| | |
6478 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts| | |
164 | 6479 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions| |
7 | 6480 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme| |
6481 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler| | |
6482 doc/ documentation |write-local-help| | |
6483 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin| | |
6484 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression| | |
6485 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap| | |
6486 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans| | |
6487 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim| | |
9116
bc38030aec7d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/26852128a2b713ef49341a0c18daba928444e7eb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9098
diff
changeset
|
6488 pack/ packages |:packadd| |
7 | 6489 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin| |
6490 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding| | |
650 | 6491 spell/ spell checking files |spell| |
7 | 6492 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile| |
6493 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor| | |
6494 | |
6495 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command. | |
6496 | |
6497 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations: | |
6498 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences. | |
6499 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system | |
6500 administrator. | |
6501 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim. | |
6502 *after-directory* | |
6503 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is | |
6504 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed | |
6505 defaults (rarely needed) | |
6506 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for | |
6507 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults | |
6508 or system-wide settings (rarely needed). | |
6509 | |
10211
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6510 More entries are added when using |packages|. If it gets very long |
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6511 then `:set rtp` will be truncated, use `:echo &rtp` to see the full |
b7da8d4c594c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d07969093a9b3051511c478d71c36de6fc33c0d6
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10198
diff
changeset
|
6512 string. |
9116
bc38030aec7d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/26852128a2b713ef49341a0c18daba928444e7eb
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9098
diff
changeset
|
6513 |
7 | 6514 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal |
6515 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for | |
10 | 6516 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid |
7 | 6517 wildcards. |
6518 See |:runtime|. | |
6519 Example: > | |
6520 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME | |
6521 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your | |
6522 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a | |
6523 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime | |
6524 files). | |
6525 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the | |
6526 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME | |
6527 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put | |
6528 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed | |
6529 runtime files. | |
13437 | 6530 When Vim is started with |--clean| the home directory entries are not |
6531 included. | |
7 | 6532 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6533 security reasons. | |
6534 | |
6535 *'scroll'* *'scr'* | |
6536 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height) | |
6537 local to window | |
6538 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be | |
6539 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size | |
6540 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will | |
10 | 6541 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window |
7 | 6542 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives |
6543 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference | |
6544 when lines wrap} | |
6545 | |
6546 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'* | |
6547 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off) | |
6548 local to window | |
6549 {not in Vi} | |
6550 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current | |
6551 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have | |
6552 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the | |
6553 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'. | |
6554 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be | |
6555 interpreted. | |
6556 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another | |
6557 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows | |
6558 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not. | |
6559 | |
6560 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'* | |
6561 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1) | |
6562 global | |
6563 {not in Vi} | |
6564 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the | |
6565 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E, | |
6566 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly. | |
532 | 6567 When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the |
6568 percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window | |
6569 height. | |
7 | 6570 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set. |
6571 | |
6572 *'scrolloff'* *'so'* | |
10218
584c835a2de1
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/50ba526fbf3e9e5e0e6b0b3086a4d5df581ebc7e
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10211
diff
changeset
|
6573 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0, set to 5 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 6574 global |
6575 {not in Vi} | |
6576 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor. | |
6577 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If | |
6578 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be | |
6579 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or | |
6580 when long lines wrap). | |
6581 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'. | |
6582 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
6583 | |
6584 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'* | |
6585 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump") | |
6586 global | |
6587 {not in Vi} | |
6588 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how | |
236 | 6589 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind |
6590 Options. | |
7 | 6591 The following words are available: |
6592 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
6593 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows | |
6594 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical | |
6595 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first | |
6596 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving | |
6597 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may | |
6598 reach a position before the start or after the end of | |
6599 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when | |
6600 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll | |
6601 to the desired position when possible. | |
6602 When now making that window the current one, two | |
6603 things can be done with the relative offset: | |
6604 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is | |
6605 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current | |
6606 window. When going back to the other window, the | |
1152 | 6607 new relative offset will be used. |
7 | 6608 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are |
6609 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When | |
6610 going back to the other window, it still uses the | |
6611 same relative offset. | |
6612 Also see |scroll-binding|. | |
819 | 6613 When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding, |
6614 even when "ver" isn't there. | |
7 | 6615 |
6616 *'sections'* *'sect'* | |
6617 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh") | |
6618 global | |
6619 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of | |
6620 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start | |
6621 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh". | |
6622 | |
6623 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523* | |
6624 'secure' boolean (default off) | |
6625 global | |
6626 {not in Vi} | |
6627 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in | |
6628 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are | |
6629 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into | |
6630 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is | |
6631 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be | |
10 | 6632 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set |
7 | 6633 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then. |
6634 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6635 security reasons. | |
6636 | |
6637 *'selection'* *'sel'* | |
6638 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive") | |
6639 global | |
6640 {not in Vi} | |
6641 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used | |
6642 in Visual and Select mode. | |
6643 Possible values: | |
6644 value past line inclusive ~ | |
6645 old no yes | |
6646 inclusive yes yes | |
6647 exclusive yes no | |
6648 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one | |
6649 character past the line. | |
6650 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included | |
6651 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the | |
6652 selection. | |
9975
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
6653 When "old" is used and 'virtualedit' allows the cursor to move past |
03fa8a51e9dc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e4a3bcf28d92d0bde9ca227ccb40d401038185e5
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9913
diff
changeset
|
6654 the end of line the line break still isn't included. |
7 | 6655 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end |
6656 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when | |
6657 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty. | |
6658 | |
6659 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
6660 | |
6661 *'selectmode'* *'slm'* | |
6662 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "") | |
6663 global | |
6664 {not in Vi} | |
6665 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start | |
6666 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started. | |
6667 Possible values: | |
6668 mouse when using the mouse | |
6669 key when using shifted special keys | |
6670 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V | |
6671 See |Select-mode|. | |
6672 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command. | |
6673 | |
6674 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'* | |
6675 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds, | |
13437 | 6676 help,options,tabpages,winsize,terminal") |
7 | 6677 global |
6678 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
6679 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 6680 feature} |
6681 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma | |
6682 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring | |
6683 something: | |
6684 word save and restore ~ | |
6685 blank empty windows | |
6686 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows | |
6687 curdir the current directory | |
6688 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
6689 fold options | |
6690 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter | |
75 | 6691 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only |
6692 String and Number types are stored. | |
7 | 6693 help the help window |
6694 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
6695 global values for local options) | |
6696 options all options and mappings (also global values for local | |
6697 options) | |
6698 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns' | |
6699 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located | |
6700 will become the current directory (useful with | |
6701 projects accessed over a network from different | |
6702 systems) | |
6703 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward | |
6704 slashes | |
827 | 6705 tabpages all tab pages; without this only the current tab page |
6706 is restored, so that you can make a session for each | |
6707 tab page separately | |
14519 | 6708 terminal include terminal windows where the command can be |
6709 restored | |
7 | 6710 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when |
6711 on Windows or DOS | |
6712 winpos position of the whole Vim window | |
6713 winsize window sizes | |
6714 | |
6715 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir". | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6716 When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
6717 with absolute paths. |
7 | 6718 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files |
6719 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
6720 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
6721 | |
6722 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91* | |
6723 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh", | |
6724 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or | |
6725 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd") | |
6726 global | |
6727 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the | |
6728 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash' | |
6729 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'. | |
10 | 6730 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f". |
7 | 6731 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. |
6732 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6733 |
7 | 6734 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6735 it in quotes or escape the space. Example with quotes: > |
7 | 6736 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f |
6737 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and | |
10 | 6738 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the |
7 | 6739 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6740 name. Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path |
7 | 6741 separators. |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6742 Example with escaped space (Vim will do this when initializing the |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6743 option from $SHELL): > |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6744 :set shell=/bin/with\\\ space/sh |
14519 | 6745 < The resulting value of 'shell' is "/bin/with\ space/sh", two |
13162
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6746 backslashes are consumed by `:set`. |
51521b8a370c
patch 8.0.1455: if $SHELL contains a space then 'shell' is incorrect
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13154
diff
changeset
|
6747 |
7 | 6748 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be |
6749 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com" | |
6750 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g., | |
6751 filtering). | |
6752 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is | |
6753 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: > | |
6754 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos | |
6755 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6756 security reasons. | |
6757 | |
6758 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'* | |
3356 | 6759 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c"; |
3371 | 6760 MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' does not |
6761 contain "sh" somewhere: "/c") | |
7 | 6762 global |
6763 {not in Vi} | |
6764 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g., | |
6765 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like | |
6766 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to | |
11262 | 6767 reduce the need to set this option by the user. |
3082 | 6768 On Unix it can have more than one flag. Each white space separated |
6769 part is passed as an argument to the shell command. | |
6770 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes. | |
6771 Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. | |
7 | 6772 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6773 security reasons. | |
6774 | |
6775 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'* | |
6776 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee") | |
6777 global | |
6778 {not in Vi} | |
6779 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix| | |
6780 feature} | |
6781 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the | |
10 | 6782 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about |
7 | 6783 including spaces and backslashes. |
6784 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
6785 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
6786 of this option). | |
6787 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly | |
6788 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen. | |
6789 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved | |
6790 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or | |
6791 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the | |
2788 | 6792 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the |
6793 default becomes "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included. | |
6794 Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses | |
6795 "sh". | |
7 | 6796 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" |
6797 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
6798 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was | |
6799 explicitly set before. | |
6800 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the | |
6801 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg' | |
6802 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do | |
6803 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space. | |
6804 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ". | |
6805 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
6806 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
6807 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6808 security reasons. | |
6809 | |
6810 *'shellquote'* *'shq'* | |
6811 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell' | |
6812 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"") | |
6813 global | |
6814 {not in Vi} | |
6815 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
6816 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the | |
6817 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's | |
6818 probably not useful to set both options. | |
6819 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for | |
6820 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell | |
6821 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according | |
6822 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the | |
6823 user. See |dos-shell|. | |
6824 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6825 security reasons. | |
6826 | |
6827 *'shellredir'* *'srr'* | |
6828 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1") | |
6829 global | |
6830 {not in Vi} | |
6831 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary | |
6832 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces | |
6833 and backslashes. | |
6834 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary | |
6835 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value | |
6836 of this option). | |
6837 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh" | |
6838 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the | |
6839 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes | |
6840 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included. | |
6841 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked | |
6842 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with | |
6843 ".exe" appended are checked for. | |
6844 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc" | |
6845 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set | |
6846 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was | |
6847 explicitly set before. | |
6848 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will | |
6849 become obsolete (at least for Unix). | |
6850 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
6851 security reasons. | |
6852 | |
6853 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'* | |
6854 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off) | |
6855 global | |
6856 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2} | |
6857 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is | |
6858 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or | |
6859 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to | |
6860 forward slashes by Vim. | |
6861 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some | |
6862 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening | |
6863 any file for best results. This might change in the future. | |
6864 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path | |
6865 separator. To test if this is so use: > | |
6866 if exists('+shellslash') | |
6867 < | |
168 | 6868 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'* |
6869 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on) | |
6870 global | |
6871 {not in Vi} | |
6872 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe. | |
6873 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway. | |
2965 | 6874 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and |
6875 later. You can check it with: > | |
168 | 6876 :if has("filterpipe") |
6877 < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file | |
6878 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection. | |
6879 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding | |
6880 can be detected. | |
6881 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|, | |
6882 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when | |
6883 'shelltemp' is off. | |
9533
9f921133ee90
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/269f595f9eef584937e7eae70fde68cdd7da5bcf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9464
diff
changeset
|
6884 The `system()` function does not respect this option and always uses |
9f921133ee90
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/269f595f9eef584937e7eae70fde68cdd7da5bcf
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9464
diff
changeset
|
6885 temp files. |
11160 | 6886 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
6887 is reset. | |
168 | 6888 |
7 | 6889 *'shelltype'* *'st'* |
6890 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0) | |
6891 global | |
6892 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga} | |
6893 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work | |
6894 which use a shell. | |
6895 0 and 1: always use the shell | |
6896 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines | |
6897 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command | |
6898 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly. | |
6899 | |
6900 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands | |
6901 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands | |
6902 | |
3371 | 6903 *'shellxescape'* *'sxe'* |
6904 'shellxescape' 'sxe' string (default: ""; | |
6905 for MS-DOS and MS-Windows: "\"&|<>()@^") | |
6906 global | |
6907 {not in Vi} | |
6908 When 'shellxquote' is set to "(" then the characters listed in this | |
6909 option will be escaped with a '^' character. This makes it possible | |
6910 to execute most external commands with cmd.exe. | |
6911 | |
7 | 6912 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'* |
6913 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: ""; | |
3359 | 6914 for Win32, when 'shell' is cmd.exe: "(" |
6915 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh" | |
6916 somewhere: "\"" | |
7 | 6917 for Unix, when using system(): "\"") |
6918 global | |
6919 {not in Vi} | |
6920 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for | |
6921 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See | |
6922 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful | |
6923 to set both options. | |
3359 | 6924 When the value is '(' then ')' is appended. When the value is '"(' |
6925 then ')"' is appended. | |
6926 When the value is '(' then also see 'shellxescape'. | |
3352 | 6927 This is an empty string by default on most systems, but is known to be |
6928 useful for on Win32 version, either for cmd.exe which automatically | |
6929 strips off the first and last quote on a command, or 3rd-party shells | |
6930 such as the MKS Korn Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The | |
6931 default is adjusted according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need | |
6932 to set this option by the user. See |dos-shell|. | |
7 | 6933 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
6934 security reasons. | |
6935 | |
6936 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'* | |
6937 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off) | |
6938 global | |
6939 {not in Vi} | |
6940 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and < | |
6941 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to | |
6942 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible). | |
6943 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
6944 | |
6945 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'* | |
6946 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8) | |
6947 local to buffer | |
10 | 6948 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for |
7 | 6949 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc. |
3893 | 6950 When zero the 'ts' value will be used. Use the |shiftwidth()| |
6951 function to get the effective shiftwidth value. | |
7 | 6952 |
6953 *'shortmess'* *'shm'* | |
168 | 6954 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "", |
6955 POSIX default: "A") | |
7 | 6956 global |
6957 {not in Vi} | |
6958 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file | |
6959 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages. | |
6960 It is a list of flags: | |
6961 flag meaning when present ~ | |
6962 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)" | |
6963 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]" | |
6964 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters" | |
6965 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]" | |
6966 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]" | |
6967 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]" | |
6968 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message | |
6969 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command | |
6970 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of | |
6971 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]". | |
6972 a all of the above abbreviations | |
6973 | |
6974 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message | |
6975 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on) | |
6976 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message. | |
6977 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn"). | |
6978 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search | |
6979 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages | |
6980 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit | |
6981 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column. | |
6982 Ignored in Ex mode. | |
6983 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to | |
233 | 6984 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle. |
7 | 6985 Ignored in Ex mode. |
6986 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file | |
6987 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file | |
6988 is found. | |
6989 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|. | |
5946 | 6990 c don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages. For example, |
6991 "-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match", | |
6992 "Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc. | |
8560
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6993 q use "recording" instead of "recording @a" |
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6994 F don't give the file info when editing a file, like `:silent` |
f3c636c673f7
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/426dd0219512af5f4abeb0901b533159253ffba3
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8497
diff
changeset
|
6995 was used for the command |
7 | 6996 |
6997 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers | |
6998 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as | |
6999 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you | |
7000 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!" | |
7001 Useful values: | |
7002 shm= No abbreviation of message. | |
7003 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information. | |
7004 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary. | |
7005 | |
7006 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7007 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7008 | |
7009 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'* | |
7010 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off) | |
7011 local to buffer | |
7012 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions} | |
7013 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3 | |
7014 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this | |
7015 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when | |
7016 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available | |
7017 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful | |
7018 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos | |
7019 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this | |
7020 option is always on by default. | |
7021 | |
7022 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595* | |
7023 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "") | |
7024 global | |
7025 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7026 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak| |
7 | 7027 feature} |
7028 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7029 values are "> " or "+++ ": > |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7030 :set showbreak=>\ |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7031 < Note the backslash to escape the trailing space. It's easier like |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7032 this: > |
2314
233eb4412f5d
Added 'colorcolumn' option. Partly by Gregor Uhlenheuer.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2302
diff
changeset
|
7033 :let &showbreak = '+++ ' |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7034 < Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and |
7 | 7035 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the |
7036 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line). | |
7037 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in | |
7038 'highlight'. | |
7039 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently. | |
7040 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the | |
7041 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'. | |
7042 | |
7043 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'* | |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
7044 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, |
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
7045 Vi default: off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 7046 global |
7047 {not in Vi} | |
7048 {not available when compiled without the | |
7049 |+cmdline_info| feature} | |
1152 | 7050 Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen. Set this |
7051 option off if your terminal is slow. | |
7 | 7052 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown: |
7053 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters. | |
2324
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
7054 If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6" |
0a258a67051d
In Visual mode with 'showcmd' display the number of bytes and characters.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2317
diff
changeset
|
7055 means two characters and six bytes. |
7 | 7056 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines. |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7057 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
7058 {lines}x{columns}. |
7 | 7059 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7060 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7061 | |
7062 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'* | |
7063 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off) | |
7064 global | |
7065 {not in Vi} | |
7066 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the | |
7067 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search | |
10 | 7068 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have |
7 | 7069 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are |
7070 required (coding style permitting). | |
1621 | 7071 Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in |
7072 'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not | |
7073 match the typed text. | |
7 | 7074 |
7075 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'* | |
7076 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off) | |
7077 global | |
7078 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The | |
7079 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to | |
7080 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'. | |
7081 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7082 seen or not). |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7083 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7084 reset. |
7 | 7085 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character |
7086 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs. | |
7087 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and | |
7088 blinking when showing the match. | |
7089 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show | |
7090 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite | |
7091 matches. | |
699 | 7092 Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving |
7093 around |pi_paren.txt|. | |
7094 Note: Use of the short form is rated PG. | |
7 | 7095 |
7096 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'* | |
7097 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
7098 global | |
7099 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line. | |
7100 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for | |
7101 this message. | |
10 | 7102 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this |
7 | 7103 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is |
7104 not set. | |
7105 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
7106 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7107 | |
677 | 7108 *'showtabline'* *'stal'* |
7109 'showtabline' 'stal' number (default 1) | |
7110 global | |
7111 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7112 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
677 | 7113 feature} |
7114 The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels | |
7115 will be displayed: | |
7116 0: never | |
7117 1: only if there are at least two tab pages | |
7118 2: always | |
7119 This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages | |
7120 line. | |
7121 See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages. | |
7122 | |
7 | 7123 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'* |
7124 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0) | |
7125 global | |
7126 {not in Vi} | |
7127 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when | |
7128 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen. | |
7129 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen. | |
7130 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using | |
7131 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl" | |
7132 commands. | |
7133 | |
7134 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'* | |
7135 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0) | |
7136 global | |
7137 {not in Vi} | |
7138 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the | |
534 | 7139 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a |
7140 value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero | |
7141 value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in | |
7142 horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option | |
7143 to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor | |
7144 horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too | |
7145 close to the beginning of the line. | |
7 | 7146 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
7147 | |
7148 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as | |
7149 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7150 onto the "extends" character: > |
7 | 7151 |
7152 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:< | |
7153 :set sidescrolloff=1 | |
9852
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7154 < |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7155 *'signcolumn'* *'scl'* |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7156 'signcolumn' 'scl' string (default "auto") |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7157 local to window |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7158 {not in Vi} |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7159 {not available when compiled without the |+signs| |
4eea48b76d03
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/95ec9d6a6ab3117d60ff638670a803d43974ba51
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9737
diff
changeset
|
7160 feature} |
9860
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7161 Whether or not to draw the signcolumn. Valid values are: |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7162 "auto" only when there is a sign to display |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7163 "no" never |
9eaf8ef656e9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0952131376a517fc12dc5ae908a97018b4ee23f0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9852
diff
changeset
|
7164 "yes" always |
7 | 7165 |
7166 | |
7167 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'* | |
7168 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off) | |
7169 global | |
7170 {not in Vi} | |
7171 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper | |
7172 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and | |
7173 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N", | |
3557 | 7174 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc. After |
7 | 7175 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command, |
7176 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>. | |
7177 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
7178 | |
7179 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'* | |
7180 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off) | |
7181 local to buffer | |
7182 {not in Vi} | |
7183 {not available when compiled without the | |
7184 |+smartindent| feature} | |
7185 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like | |
7186 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does | |
7187 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict, | |
2662 | 7188 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set, |
2642 | 7189 setting 'si' has no effect. 'indentexpr' is a more advanced |
7190 alternative. | |
7 | 7191 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'. |
7192 An indent is automatically inserted: | |
7193 - After a line ending in '{'. | |
7194 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'. | |
7195 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command). | |
7196 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is | |
7197 given the same indent as the matching '{'. | |
7198 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for | |
7199 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent | |
10 | 7200 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this |
7 | 7201 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H. |
7202 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted | |
7203 right. | |
11160 | 7204 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7205 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7206 reset. |
7 | 7207 |
7208 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'* | |
7209 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off) | |
7210 global | |
7211 {not in Vi} | |
7212 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to | |
648 | 7213 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places. A |
7214 <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the | |
7215 line. | |
650 | 7216 When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or |
648 | 7217 'softtabstop'. 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or |
7218 right |shift-left-right|. | |
1263 | 7219 What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab' |
7 | 7220 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the |
11 | 7221 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7222 This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7223 reset. |
7 | 7224 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
7225 | |
7226 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'* | |
7227 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0) | |
7228 local to buffer | |
7229 {not in Vi} | |
7230 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing | |
7231 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like | |
7232 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is | |
7233 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value | |
7234 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However, | |
7235 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters. | |
7236 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off. | |
3893 | 7237 When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used. |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7238 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
7239 when 'paste' is reset. |
7 | 7240 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of |
7241 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s. | |
7242 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is | |
7243 set. | |
7244 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. | |
7245 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7246 If Vim is compiled with the |+vartabs| feature then the value of |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7247 'softtabstop' will be ignored if |'varsofttabstop'| is set to |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7248 anything other than an empty string. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7249 |
221 | 7250 *'spell'* *'nospell'* |
7251 'spell' boolean (default off) | |
7252 local to window | |
7253 {not in Vi} | |
7254 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7255 feature} | |
7256 When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|. | |
236 | 7257 The languages are specified with 'spelllang'. |
221 | 7258 |
386 | 7259 *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'* |
389 | 7260 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+") |
386 | 7261 local to buffer |
7262 {not in Vi} | |
7263 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7264 feature} | |
7265 Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be | |
7266 checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted | |
484 | 7267 with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled). |
386 | 7268 When this check is not wanted make this option empty. |
7269 Only used when 'spell' is set. | |
389 | 7270 Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about |
7271 including spaces and backslashes. | |
480 | 7272 To set this option automatically depending on the language, see |
7273 |set-spc-auto|. | |
386 | 7274 |
314 | 7275 *'spellfile'* *'spf'* |
7276 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty) | |
7277 local to buffer | |
7278 {not in Vi} | |
7279 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7280 feature} | |
7281 Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw| | |
401 | 7282 commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the |
7283 path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory. | |
386 | 7284 *E765* |
7285 It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the | |
7286 |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using | |
7287 a personal word list file and a project word list file. | |
314 | 7288 When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for |
819 | 7289 you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable. If |
7290 there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created. For the file | |
7291 name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used, | |
353 | 7292 ignoring the region. |
7293 The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not | |
7294 have to appear in 'spelllang'. | |
7295 Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region | |
7296 name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when | |
7297 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files | |
7298 without region name will be found. | |
336 | 7299 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
7300 security reasons. | |
314 | 7301 |
221 | 7302 *'spelllang'* *'spl'* |
314 | 7303 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en") |
221 | 7304 local to buffer |
7305 {not in Vi} | |
7306 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7307 feature} | |
353 | 7308 A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is |
7309 on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: > | |
7310 set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical | |
7311 < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words | |
7312 that are not recognized will be highlighted. | |
7313 The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is | |
7314 recommended to separate the two letter language name from a | |
7315 specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words. | |
7316 A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is | |
7317 the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one | |
7318 region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian | |
7319 English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great | |
7477
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
7320 Britain. (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than |
05cf4cc72a9f
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/fa7353428f705f7a13465a1943dddeede4083023
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7272
diff
changeset
|
7321 en_ca, en_gb and en_us). |
5477 | 7322 If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from |
7323 spell checking. This is useful when editing text that also has Asian | |
7324 words. | |
484 | 7325 *E757* |
419 | 7326 As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The |
7327 first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name | |
7328 (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter). | |
7329 This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct | |
7330 encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it. | |
236 | 7331 When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good |
419 | 7332 idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the |
7333 files twice. | |
353 | 7334 How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|. |
221 | 7335 |
653 | 7336 If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name |
7337 for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin | |
7338 will ask you if you want to download the file. | |
7339 | |
480 | 7340 After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files |
7341 "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang' | |
15068 | 7342 up to the first character that is not an ASCII letter or number and |
7343 not a dash. Also see |set-spc-auto|. | |
480 | 7344 |
7345 | |
344 | 7346 *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'* |
7347 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best") | |
7348 global | |
7349 {not in Vi} | |
7350 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7351 feature} | |
593 | 7352 Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and |
374 | 7353 the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of |
7354 items: | |
7355 | |
7356 best Internal method that works best for English. Finds | |
7357 changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like | |
7358 scoring to improve the ordering. | |
7359 | |
7360 double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the | |
7361 results. The first method is "fast", the other method | |
344 | 7362 computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad |
374 | 7363 word. That only works when the language specifies |
7364 sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give | |
7365 better results. | |
7366 | |
7367 fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes: | |
7368 character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for | |
7369 simple typing mistakes. | |
7370 | |
593 | 7371 {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|. |
484 | 7372 Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of |
7373 suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines' | |
7374 minus two. | |
7375 | |
374 | 7376 file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns, |
7377 separated by a slash. The first column contains the | |
7378 bad word, the second column the suggested good word. | |
7379 Example: | |
7380 theribal/terrible ~ | |
7381 Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the | |
7382 top of the suggestion list with the internal methods. | |
7383 Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for | |
7384 comments. | |
5862 | 7385 The word in the second column must be correct, |
7386 otherwise it will not be used. Add the word to an | |
7387 ".add" file if it is currently flagged as a spelling | |
7388 mistake. | |
374 | 7389 The file is used for all languages. |
7390 | |
7391 expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid | |
7392 trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled | |
7393 word. The expression must evaluate to a List of | |
7394 Lists, each with a suggestion and a score. | |
7395 Example: | |
11062 | 7396 [['the', 33], ['that', 44]] ~ |
593 | 7397 Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the |
374 | 7398 internal methods use. A lower score is better. |
7399 This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily | |
7400 set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part. | |
7401 Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the | |
7402 'verbose' option to a non-zero value. | |
7403 | |
7404 Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may | |
7405 appear several times in any order. Example: > | |
7406 :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest() | |
7407 < | |
7408 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
7409 security reasons. | |
344 | 7410 |
7411 | |
7 | 7412 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'* |
7413 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off) | |
7414 global | |
7415 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7416 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 7417 feature} |
7418 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current | |
7419 one. |:split| | |
7420 | |
7421 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'* | |
7422 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off) | |
7423 global | |
7424 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7425 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 7426 feature} |
7427 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the | |
7428 current one. |:vsplit| | |
7429 | |
7430 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'* | |
7431 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on) | |
7432 global | |
7433 {not in Vi} | |
7434 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first | |
11 | 7435 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column |
10 | 7436 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B, |
11 | 7437 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>" |
7 | 7438 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing |
7439 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that | |
7440 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+". | |
7441 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column | |
7442 where it was the last time the buffer was edited. | |
7443 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set. | |
7444 | |
2709 | 7445 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542* |
7 | 7446 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty) |
40 | 7447 global or local to window |global-local| |
7 | 7448 {not in Vi} |
7449 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| | |
7450 feature} | |
7451 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line. | |
7452 Also see |status-line|. | |
7453 | |
7454 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with | |
7455 normal text. Each status line item is of the form: | |
7456 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item} | |
7876
93f747af7b58
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5e9b2fa9bb0e6061cf18457c173cd141a5dc9c92
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7687
diff
changeset
|
7457 All fields except the {item} are optional. A single percent sign can |
2709 | 7458 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified. *E541* |
7 | 7459 |
680 | 7460 When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression, |
7461 evaluated and the result is used as the option value. Example: > | |
7462 :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine() | |
7463 < The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too. | |
3445 | 7464 Note that the "%!" expression is evaluated in the context of the |
7465 current window and buffer, while %{} items are evaluated in the | |
7466 context of the window that the statusline belongs to. | |
680 | 7467 |
7468 When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made | |
7469 empty to avoid further errors. Otherwise screen updating would loop. | |
7470 | |
7 | 7471 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and |
7472 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|. | |
7473 | |
7474 field meaning ~ | |
233 | 7475 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified |
7 | 7476 when minwid is larger than the length of the item. |
233 | 7477 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'. |
7 | 7478 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'. |
7479 Value must be 50 or less. | |
10 | 7480 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<' |
7 | 7481 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be |
7482 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number | |
7483 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like | |
7484 an exponential notation. | |
7485 item A one letter code as described below. | |
7486 | |
7487 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The | |
7488 second character in "item" is the type: | |
7489 N for number | |
7490 S for string | |
7491 F for flags as described below | |
7492 - not applicable | |
7493 | |
7494 item meaning ~ | |
1152 | 7495 f S Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current |
7496 directory. | |
7 | 7497 F S Full path to the file in the buffer. |
7498 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer. | |
1698 | 7499 m F Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off. |
7 | 7500 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-". |
1698 | 7501 r F Readonly flag, text is "[RO]". |
7 | 7502 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO". |
1698 | 7503 h F Help buffer flag, text is "[help]". |
7 | 7504 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP". |
1698 | 7505 w F Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]". |
7 | 7506 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV". |
1698 | 7507 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]". See 'filetype'. |
7 | 7508 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'. |
2411
68e394361ca3
Add "q" item for 'statusline'. Add w:quickfix_title. (Lech Lorens)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2400
diff
changeset
|
7509 q S "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty. |
7 | 7510 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are |
7511 being used: "<keymap>" | |
7512 n N Buffer number. | |
2709 | 7513 b N Value of character under cursor. |
7 | 7514 B N As above, in hexadecimal. |
7515 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1. | |
7516 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added) | |
7517 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature} | |
7518 O N As above, in hexadecimal. | |
233 | 7519 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.) |
7 | 7520 l N Line number. |
7521 L N Number of lines in buffer. | |
7522 c N Column number. | |
7523 v N Virtual column number. | |
10 | 7524 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'. |
7 | 7525 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|. |
7526 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the | |
5055 | 7527 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length, unless |
7528 translated. | |
233 | 7529 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max}) |
7 | 7530 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one. |
680 | 7531 { NF Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result. |
13742
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7532 Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'. The |
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7533 expression cannot contain a '}' character, call a function to |
a34b1323286c
patch 8.0.1743: terminal window options are named inconsistently
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13735
diff
changeset
|
7534 work around that. |
7 | 7535 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and |
7536 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere. | |
7537 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed. | |
681 | 7538 T N For 'tabline': start of tab page N label. Use %T after the last |
7539 label. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7540 X N For 'tabline': start of close tab N label. Use %X after the | |
7541 label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X. Use %999X for a "close current tab" | |
7542 mark. This information is used for mouse clicks. | |
7 | 7543 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start. |
7544 No width fields allowed. | |
7545 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items. | |
7546 No width fields allowed. | |
680 | 7547 # - Set highlight group. The name must follow and then a # again. |
7548 Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname. The same | |
7549 highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current | |
7550 windows. | |
7 | 7551 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the |
233 | 7552 minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*. |
7 | 7553 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied |
7554 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows. | |
7555 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9| | |
7556 | |
1698 | 7557 When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when |
7558 that flag comes right after plaintext. This will make a nice display | |
7559 when flags are used like in the examples below. | |
7 | 7560 |
233 | 7561 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are |
7 | 7562 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will |
7563 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear | |
7564 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. > | |
7565 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)... | |
7245
8896150aba23
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/e392eb41f8dfc01bd13634e534ac6b4d505326f4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7233
diff
changeset
|
7566 < *g:actual_curbuf* |
7 | 7567 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status |
7568 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set | |
7569 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is | |
233 | 7570 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context. |
14519 | 7571 The variable "g:actual_curbuf" is set to the `bufnr()` number of the |
634 | 7572 real current buffer. |
7573 | |
3682 | 7574 The 'statusline' option will be evaluated in the |sandbox| if set from |
7575 a modeline, see |sandbox-option|. | |
634 | 7576 |
7577 It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while | |
7578 evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|. | |
7 | 7579 |
7580 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting | |
7581 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by | |
7582 setting an option without changing its value. Example: > | |
7583 :let &ro = &ro | |
7584 | |
7585 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes. | |
7586 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules | |
7587 described above. | |
7588 | |
199 | 7589 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable! |
7 | 7590 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
7591 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim --clean" to get it right. |
7 | 7592 |
7593 Examples: | |
7594 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set > | |
7595 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P | |
7596 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") > | |
7597 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P | |
7598 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. > | |
7599 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b' | |
7600 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red | |
7601 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded > | |
7602 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h... | |
7603 < In the |:autocmd|'s: > | |
7604 :let b:gzflag = 1 | |
7605 < And: > | |
7606 :unlet b:gzflag | |
7607 < And define this function: > | |
7608 :function VarExists(var, val) | |
7609 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif | |
7610 :endfunction | |
7611 < | |
7612 *'suffixes'* *'su'* | |
7613 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj") | |
7614 global | |
7615 {not in Vi} | |
7616 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files | |
7617 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the | |
10 | 7618 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as |
7619 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a | |
7 | 7620 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about |
7621 including spaces and backslashes). | |
7622 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files. | |
7623 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7624 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7625 uses another default. | |
7626 | |
7627 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'* | |
7628 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "") | |
7629 local to buffer | |
7630 {not in Vi} | |
7631 {not available when compiled without the | |
7632 |+file_in_path| feature} | |
7633 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a | |
7634 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: > | |
7635 :set suffixesadd=.java | |
7636 < | |
7637 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'* | |
7638 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on) | |
7639 local to buffer | |
7640 {not in Vi} | |
10 | 7641 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a |
7 | 7642 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with |
7643 confidential information that even root must not be able to access. | |
7644 Careful: All text will be in memory: | |
7645 - Don't use this for big files. | |
7646 - Recovery will be impossible! | |
7647 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and | |
7648 'swapfile' is set. | |
7649 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is | |
7650 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is | |
7651 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created. | |
7652 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|. | |
5763 | 7653 If you want to open a new buffer without creating a swap file for it, |
7654 use the |:noswapfile| modifier. | |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
7655 See 'directory' for where the swap file is created. |
7 | 7656 |
7657 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to | |
7658 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|. | |
7659 | |
7660 *'swapsync'* *'sws'* | |
7661 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync") | |
7662 global | |
7663 {not in Vi} | |
7664 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after | |
10 | 7665 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems. |
7 | 7666 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and |
7667 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work. | |
7668 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it, | |
7669 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some | |
7670 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system | |
7671 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default | |
7672 fsync(), which may work better on some systems. | |
36 | 7673 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file. |
7 | 7674 |
7675 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'* | |
7676 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "") | |
7677 global | |
7678 {not in Vi} | |
7679 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers. | |
7680 Possible values (comma separated list): | |
7681 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that | |
7682 contains the specified buffer (if there is one). | |
7683 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows. | |
7684 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when | |
7685 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is | |
7686 also used in all buffer related split commands, for | |
7687 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind". | |
825 | 7688 usetab Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab |
856 | 7689 pages. |
7 | 7690 split If included, split the current window before loading |
3153 | 7691 a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors. |
7692 Otherwise: do not split, use current window. | |
6843 | 7693 vsplit Just like "split" but split vertically. |
1621 | 7694 newtab Like "split", but open a new tab page. Overrules |
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2283
diff
changeset
|
7695 "split" when both are present. |
7 | 7696 |
410 | 7697 *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'* |
7698 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000) | |
7699 local to buffer | |
7700 {not in Vi} | |
7701 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7702 feature} | |
419 | 7703 Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the |
7704 text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not | |
7705 be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared. | |
410 | 7706 This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one |
7707 long line. | |
7708 Set to zero to remove the limit. | |
7709 | |
7 | 7710 *'syntax'* *'syn'* |
7711 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty) | |
7712 local to buffer | |
7713 {not in Vi} | |
7714 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax| | |
7715 feature} | |
7716 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless | |
7717 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off". | |
7718 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the | |
7719 b:current_syntax variable does). | |
7720 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is | |
782 | 7721 not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: |
7722 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~ | |
7723 When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype | |
7724 names. Example: | |
7725 /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~ | |
7726 This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax. | |
7727 Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition, | |
7728 otherwise it will be skipped. More than one dot may appear. | |
7729 To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: > | |
7 | 7730 :set syntax=OFF |
7731 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the | |
7732 'filetype' option: > | |
7733 :set syntax=ON | |
7734 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the | |
7735 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument. | |
7736 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or | |
7737 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'. | |
36 | 7738 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal. |
7 | 7739 |
699 | 7740 *'tabline'* *'tal'* |
677 | 7741 'tabline' 'tal' string (default empty) |
674 | 7742 global |
7743 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7744 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
674 | 7745 feature} |
677 | 7746 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages |
7747 line at the top of the Vim window. When empty Vim will use a default | |
681 | 7748 tab pages line. See |setting-tabline| for more info. |
677 | 7749 |
7750 The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline' | |
688 | 7751 option and only when there is no GUI tab line. When 'e' is in |
7752 'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used | |
2572
ee53a39d5896
Last changes for the 7.3 release!
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2570
diff
changeset
|
7753 instead. Note that the two tab pages lines are very different. |
677 | 7754 |
7755 The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'. You can use | |
7756 |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out | |
681 | 7757 the text to be displayed. Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for |
7758 the second one, etc. Use "%X" items for closing labels. | |
677 | 7759 |
7760 Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others | |
7761 are invisible and you can't jump to their windows. | |
7762 | |
674 | 7763 |
699 | 7764 *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'* |
7765 'tabpagemax' 'tpm' number (default 10) | |
7766 global | |
7767 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
7768 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
699 | 7769 feature} |
7770 Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line | |
7771 argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage| | |
7772 | |
7773 | |
7774 *'tabstop'* *'ts'* | |
7 | 7775 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8) |
7776 local to buffer | |
7777 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see | |
7778 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option. | |
7779 | |
7780 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file | |
7781 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it). | |
7782 | |
7783 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim: | |
7784 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4 | |
7785 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim | |
1263 | 7786 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will |
7 | 7787 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters. |
7788 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use | |
7789 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The | |
7790 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed. | |
7791 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a | |
10 | 7792 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only |
7 | 7793 works when using Vim to edit the file. |
7794 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and | |
7795 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only) | |
7796 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have | |
7797 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this | |
7798 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is | |
7799 changed. | |
7800 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7801 If Vim is compiled with the |+vartabs| feature then the value of |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7802 'tabstop' will be ignored if |'vartabstop'| is set to anything other |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7803 than an empty string. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
7804 |
7 | 7805 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'* |
7806 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on) | |
7807 global | |
7808 {not in Vi} | |
7809 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either | |
10 | 7810 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary |
7 | 7811 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search |
7812 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted. | |
7813 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that | |
7814 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the | |
7815 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off. | |
7816 | |
7817 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags | |
10 | 7818 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for |
7 | 7819 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When |
7820 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done. | |
7821 | |
7822 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line | |
7823 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: > | |
1621 | 7824 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some comment/ |
7 | 7825 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>] |
7826 | |
7827 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7828 files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used |
7 | 7829 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search. |
7830 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only | |
7831 be found in the retry. | |
7832 | |
22 | 7833 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second, |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7834 linear search can be avoided when case is ignored. Use a value of '2' |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7835 in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be case-fold |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7836 sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command: |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7837 "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version 5.x or higher |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7838 (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used for this as |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7839 well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work. |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7840 |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7841 By default, tag searches are case-sensitive. Case is ignored when |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7842 'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7843 "ignore". |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7844 Also when 'tagcase' is "followscs" and 'smartcase' is set, or |
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7845 'tagcase' is "smart", and the pattern contains only lowercase |
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7846 characters. |
7 | 7847 |
7848 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match | |
7849 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags | |
7850 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off. | |
7851 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on | |
7852 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above | |
7853 must be included in the tags file. | |
7854 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g., | |
7855 command-line completion and ":help"). | |
7856 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions} | |
7857 | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7858 *'tagcase'* *'tc'* |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7859 'tagcase' 'tc' string (default "followic") |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7860 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7861 {not in Vi} |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7862 This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7863 file: |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7864 followic Follow the 'ignorecase' option |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7865 followscs Follow the 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7866 ignore Ignore case |
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7867 match Match case |
9913
bb00c661b3a4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/66e29d7112e437b2b50efe1f82c7e892736d23e4
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9887
diff
changeset
|
7868 smart Ignore case unless an upper case letter is used |
11160 | 7869 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7870 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7266
6ba7182fb7bd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/0f6562e9036f889185dff49a75c7fc5ffb28b307
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7245
diff
changeset
|
7871 |
7 | 7872 *'taglength'* *'tl'* |
7873 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0) | |
7874 global | |
7875 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters. | |
7876 | |
7877 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'* | |
7878 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
7879 global | |
7880 {not in Vi} | |
824 | 7881 If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that |
7882 tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is. | |
7 | 7883 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
7884 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
7885 | |
7886 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433* | |
7887 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with | |
7888 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS") | |
7889 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
7890 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To | |
7891 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash | |
7892 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes). | |
7893 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path | |
7894 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in | |
7895 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see | |
7896 |tags-option|. | |
7897 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in | |
2522
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7898 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7899 find all files named "tags" below "/lib". The filename itself cannot |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7900 contain wildcards, it is used as-is. E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7901 files called "tags?". {not available when compiled without the |
d7ecfc8b784c
Update help about wildcards in 'tags' option.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2492
diff
changeset
|
7902 |+path_extra| feature} |
515 | 7903 The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names |
7904 actually used. | |
7 | 7905 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag |
7906 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The | |
7907 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case | |
7908 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags| | |
7909 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
7910 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
7911 uses another default. | |
7912 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"} | |
7913 | |
7914 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'* | |
7915 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on) | |
7916 global | |
7917 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
7918 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or | |
7919 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the | |
7920 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or | |
7921 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified | |
7922 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry. | |
7923 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a | |
7924 mapping which should not change the tagstack. | |
7925 | |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7926 *'tcldll'* |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
7927 'tcldll' string (default depends on the build) |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7928 global |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7929 {not in Vi} |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7930 {only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn| |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7931 feature} |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7932 Specifies the name of the Tcl shared library. The default is |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7933 DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL, which was specified at compile time. |
8951
0bdeaf7092bc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/aa3b15dbebf333282503d6031e2f9ba6ee4398ed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8876
diff
changeset
|
7934 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
7538
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7935 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7936 security reasons. |
c9fc24b76293
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8a5115cf18751022387af2085f374d38c60dde83
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7528
diff
changeset
|
7937 |
7 | 7938 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531* |
7939 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails: | |
7940 in the GUI: "builtin_gui" | |
7941 on Amiga: "amiga" | |
7942 on BeOS: "beos-ansi" | |
7943 on Mac: "mac-ansi" | |
7944 on MiNT: "vt52" | |
7945 on MS-DOS: "pcterm" | |
7946 on OS/2: "os2ansi" | |
7947 on Unix: "ansi" | |
7948 on VMS: "ansi" | |
7949 on Win 32: "win32") | |
7950 global | |
7951 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control | |
7952 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. | |
7953 For example: > | |
7954 :set term=$TERM | |
7955 < See |termcap|. | |
7956 | |
7957 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'* | |
7958 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'* | |
7959 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm") | |
7960 global | |
7961 {not in Vi} | |
7962 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic| | |
7963 feature} | |
7964 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified | |
7965 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping | |
7966 that some languages (such as Arabic) require. | |
7967 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when | |
7968 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored. | |
7969 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that | |
7970 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically. | |
7971 This option is reset when the GUI is started. | |
7972 For further details see |arabic.txt|. | |
7973 | |
7974 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'* | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
7975 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ GUI: "utf-8"; with |
7 | 7976 Macintosh GUI: "macroman") |
7977 global | |
7978 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| | |
7979 feature} | |
7980 {not in Vi} | |
7981 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character | |
7982 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For | |
8629
54ac275e3fc4
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/3848e00e0177abdb31bc600234967863ec487233
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8560
diff
changeset
|
7983 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the |
1152 | 7984 display). Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then |
7985 'termencoding' should be "macroman". | |
7 | 7986 *E617* |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
7987 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ GUI. After the GUI has been |
7 | 7988 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8". |
7989 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error | |
7990 message is shown. | |
7080
1a34f5272977
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ac360bf2ca293735fc7c6654dc2b3066f4c62488
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7051
diff
changeset
|
7991 For the Win32 GUI and console versions 'termencoding' is not used, |
7 | 7992 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters. |
7993 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option. | |
7994 This is the normal value. | |
7995 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See | |
7996 |encoding-table|. | |
7997 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or | |
7998 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you | |
7999 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters. | |
8000 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and | |
8001 want to edit a UTF-8 file: > | |
8002 :let &termencoding = &encoding | |
8003 :set encoding=utf-8 | |
8004 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8. | |
8005 | |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8006 *'termguicolors'* *'tgc'* *E954* |
9027
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8007 'termguicolors' 'tgc' boolean (default off) |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8008 global |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8009 {not in Vi} |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8010 {not available when compiled without the |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8011 |+termguicolors| feature} |
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8012 When on, uses |highlight-guifg| and |highlight-guibg| attributes in |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8013 the terminal (thus using 24-bit color). |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
8014 |
13314
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8015 Requires a ISO-8613-3 compatible terminal. If setting this option |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8016 does not work (produces a colorless UI) reading |xterm-true-color| |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8017 might help. |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8018 |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8019 For Win32 console, Windows 10 version 1703 (Creators Update) or later |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8020 is required. Use this check to find out: > |
65c3e8259124
patch 8.0.1531: cannot use 24 bit colors in MS-Windows console
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13234
diff
changeset
|
8021 if has('vcon') |
13341
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
8022 < This requires Vim to be built with the |+vtp| feature. |
acd7eaa13d2b
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13314
diff
changeset
|
8023 |
11473 | 8024 Note that the "cterm" attributes are still used, not the "gui" ones. |
11160 | 8025 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
9027
773d627cac0b
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/61be73bb0f965a895bfb064ea3e55476ac175162
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8969
diff
changeset
|
8026 |
13735 | 8027 *'termwinscroll'* *'twsl'* |
8028 'termwinscroll' 'twsl' number (default 10000) | |
8029 local to buffer | |
13680
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8030 {not in Vi} |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8031 {not available when compiled without the |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8032 |+terminal| feature} |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8033 Number of scrollback lines to keep. When going over this limit the |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8034 first 10% of the scrollback lines are deleted. This is just to reduce |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8035 the memory usage. See |Terminal-Normal|. |
c32e9628dc30
patch 8.0.1712: terminal scrollback is not limited
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13664
diff
changeset
|
8036 |
13735 | 8037 *'termwinkey'* *'twk'* |
8038 'termwinkey' 'twk' string (default "") | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8039 local to window |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8040 {not in Vi} |
11914 | 8041 The key that starts a CTRL-W command in a terminal window. Other keys |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8042 are sent to the job running in the window. |
11914 | 8043 The <> notation can be used, e.g.: > |
13735 | 8044 :set termwinkey=<C-L> |
11914 | 8045 < The string must be one key stroke but can be multiple bytes. |
8046 When not set CTRL-W is used, so that CTRL-W : gets you to the command | |
13735 | 8047 line. If 'termwinkey' is set to CTRL-L then CTRL-L : gets you to the |
11914 | 8048 command line. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8049 |
13735 | 8050 *'termwinsize'* *'tws'* |
8051 'termwinsize' 'tws' string (default "") | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8052 local to window |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8053 {not in Vi} |
13700
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8054 Size of the |terminal| window. Format: {rows}x{columns} or |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8055 {rows}*{columns}. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8056 - When empty the terminal gets the size from the window. |
13700
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8057 - When set with a "x" (e.g., "24x80") the terminal size is not |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8058 adjusted to the window size. If the window is smaller only the |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8059 top-left part is displayed. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8060 - When set with a "*" (e.g., "10*50") the terminal size follows the |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8061 window size, but will not be smaller than the specified rows and/or |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8062 columns. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8063 - When rows is zero then use the height of the window. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8064 - When columns is zero then use the width of the window. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8065 - Using "0x0" or "0*0" is the same as empty. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8066 |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8067 Examples: |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8068 "30x0" uses 30 rows and the current window width. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8069 "20*0" uses at least 20 rows and the current window width. |
b28d679b1843
patch 8.0.1722: cannot specify a minimal size for a terminal window
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
13680
diff
changeset
|
8070 "0*40" uses the current window height and at least 40 columns. |
11757
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8071 Note that the command running in the terminal window may still change |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8072 the size of the terminal. In that case the Vim window will be |
74abb6c84984
patch 8.0.0761: options not set properly for a terminal buffer
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11666
diff
changeset
|
8073 adjusted to that size, if possible. |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8074 |
7 | 8075 *'terse'* *'noterse'* |
8076 'terse' boolean (default off) | |
8077 global | |
8078 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message | |
8079 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being | |
8080 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi | |
8081 shortens a lot of messages} | |
8082 | |
8083 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'* | |
8084 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off) | |
8085 global | |
8086 {not in Vi} | |
8087 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'. | |
8088 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is | |
8089 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is | |
8090 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty. | |
8091 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
8092 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8093 | |
8094 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'* | |
8095 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on, | |
8096 others: default off) | |
8097 local to buffer | |
8098 {not in Vi} | |
8099 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'. | |
8100 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is | |
8101 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to | |
8102 "unix". | |
8103 | |
8104 *'textwidth'* *'tw'* | |
8105 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0) | |
8106 local to buffer | |
8107 {not in Vi} | |
8108 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be | |
8109 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8110 this. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8111 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8112 when 'paste' is reset. |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
8113 When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also |
7 | 8114 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. |
838 | 8115 When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line. |
7 | 8116 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set. |
8117 | |
8118 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'* | |
8119 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "") | |
8120 global or local to buffer |global-local| | |
8121 {not in Vi} | |
8122 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words | |
15033 | 8123 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. |
8124 | |
8125 Each line in the file should contain words with similar meaning, | |
8126 separated by non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). | |
8127 Maximum line length is 510 bytes. | |
8128 | |
15131 | 8129 An English word list was added to this github issue: |
8130 https://github.com/vim/vim/issues/629#issuecomment-443293282 | |
8131 Unpack thesaurus_pkg.zip, put the thesaurus.txt file somewhere, e.g. | |
8132 ~/.vim/thesaurus/english.txt, and the 'thesaurus' option to this file | |
8133 name. | |
15033 | 8134 |
10 | 8135 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces |
7 | 8136 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file |
8137 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes. | |
8138 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
8139 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
8140 uses another default. | |
8141 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons. | |
8142 | |
8143 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'* | |
8144 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off) | |
8145 global | |
8146 {not in Vi} | |
8147 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator. | |
8148 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
8149 | |
8150 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'* | |
8151 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on) | |
8152 global | |
8153 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'* | |
11400
0f8713fe20dc
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11262
diff
changeset
|
8154 'ttimeout' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8155 global |
8156 {not in Vi} | |
8157 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a | |
8158 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received: | |
8159 | |
8160 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~ | |
8161 off off do not time out | |
8162 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes | |
8163 off on time out on key codes | |
8164 | |
8165 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete | |
8166 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there | |
8167 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For | |
8168 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next | |
8169 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'. | |
8170 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for | |
8171 the next character to arrive. After that the already received | |
8172 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can | |
8173 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option. | |
8174 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause | |
8175 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits | |
8176 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start | |
8177 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have | |
8178 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key | |
8179 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and | |
8180 reset the 'timeout' option. | |
8181 | |
8182 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set. | |
8183 | |
8184 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'* | |
8185 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000) | |
8186 global | |
8187 {not in all versions of Vi} | |
8188 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'* | |
11400
0f8713fe20dc
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11262
diff
changeset
|
8189 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1, set to 100 in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8190 global |
8191 {not in Vi} | |
8192 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key | |
8193 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G | |
8194 when part of a command has been typed. | |
8195 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a | |
8196 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to | |
8197 a non-negative number. | |
8198 | |
8199 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~ | |
8200 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen' | |
8201 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen' | |
8202 | |
8203 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options | |
8204 tell so. A useful setting would be > | |
8205 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100 | |
8206 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after | |
8207 a tenth of a second). | |
8208 | |
8209 *'title'* *'notitle'* | |
8210 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored) | |
8211 global | |
8212 {not in Vi} | |
8213 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8214 feature} | |
8215 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of | |
8216 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to: | |
8217 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM | |
8218 Where: | |
8219 filename the name of the file being edited | |
8220 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off | |
8221 + indicates the file was modified | |
8222 = indicates the file is read-only | |
8223 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified | |
8224 (path) is the path of the file being edited | |
8225 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM" | |
8226 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles | |
8227 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and | |
8228 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and | |
8229 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap). | |
8230 *X11* | |
8231 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
8232 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11" | |
8233 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also | |
8234 works for the icon name |'icon'|. | |
8235 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title | |
8236 will not work (except in the GUI). | |
8237 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'. | |
8238 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then. | |
8239 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command: | |
8240 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY & | |
8241 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the | |
8242 title of the window should change back to what it should be after | |
8243 exiting Vim. | |
8244 | |
8245 *'titlelen'* | |
8246 'titlelen' number (default 85) | |
8247 global | |
8248 {not in Vi} | |
8249 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8250 feature} | |
8251 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window | |
10 | 8252 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is |
8253 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this. | |
7 | 8254 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But |
8255 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters | |
8256 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title | |
8257 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise, | |
8258 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used. | |
8259 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option. | |
8260 | |
8261 *'titleold'* | |
8262 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim") | |
8263 global | |
8264 {not in Vi} | |
8265 {only available when compiled with the |+title| | |
8266 feature} | |
8267 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the | |
8268 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or | |
8269 'titlestring' is not empty. | |
36 | 8270 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
8271 security reasons. | |
7 | 8272 *'titlestring'* |
8273 'titlestring' string (default "") | |
8274 global | |
8275 {not in Vi} | |
8276 {not available when compiled without the |+title| | |
8277 feature} | |
8278 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the | |
8279 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on. | |
8280 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently | |
8281 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a | |
8282 non-empty 't_ts' option). | |
8283 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will | |
10449
222b1432814e
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/5162822914372fc916a93f85848c0c82209e7cec
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10272
diff
changeset
|
8284 be restored if possible, see |X11|. |
7 | 8285 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be |
8286 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. | |
8287 Example: > | |
8288 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p") | |
8289 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70 | |
8290 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right | |
8291 of the available space. | |
8292 Some people prefer to have the file name first: > | |
8293 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%) | |
8294 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file, | |
10 | 8295 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a |
7 | 8296 separating space only when needed. |
8297 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display | |
8298 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character). | |
8299 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature} | |
8300 | |
8301 *'toolbar'* *'tb'* | |
8302 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips") | |
8303 global | |
8304 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and | |
8305 |+GUI_Photon|} | |
10 | 8306 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The |
7 | 8307 possible values are: |
8308 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons. | |
8309 text Toolbar buttons shown with text. | |
8310 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are | |
10 | 8311 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI} |
7 | 8312 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons. |
8313 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse | |
8314 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment. | |
8315 | |
8316 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the | |
8317 following: > | |
8318 :set tb=icons,text | |
8319 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They | |
8320 will show icons if both are requested. | |
8321 | |
8322 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if | |
8323 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable | |
8324 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: > | |
8325 :set guioptions-=T | |
8326 < Also see |gui-toolbar|. | |
8327 | |
8328 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'* | |
8329 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small") | |
8330 global | |
8331 {not in Vi} | |
10895
c391bfbdb452
Updated runtime files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10734
diff
changeset
|
8332 {only in the GTK+ GUI} |
7 | 8333 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are: |
8497
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8334 tiny Use tiny icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8335 small Use small icons (default). |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8336 medium Use medium-sized icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8337 large Use large icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8338 huge Use even larger icons. |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8339 giant Use very big icons. |
7 | 8340 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on |
8497
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8341 the current theme. Common dimensions are giant=48x48, huge=32x32, |
da01d5da2cfa
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/77cdfd10382e01cc51f4ba1a9177032351843151
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
8246
diff
changeset
|
8342 large=24x24, medium=24x24, small=20x20 and tiny=16x16. |
7 | 8343 |
8344 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined | |
8345 by user preferences or the current theme is used. | |
8346 | |
8347 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'* | |
8348 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on) | |
8349 global | |
8350 {not in Vi} | |
8351 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones. | |
8352 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones. | |
8353 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for | |
8354 the change to take effect, for example: > | |
8355 :set notbi term=$TERM | |
8356 < See also |termcap|. | |
8357 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin | |
8358 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty | |
8359 xterm entries...). | |
8360 | |
8361 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'* | |
8362 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm, | |
8363 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or | |
8364 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in | |
8365 a DOS console) | |
8366 global | |
8367 {not in Vi} | |
8368 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to | |
8369 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line | |
8370 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple | |
8371 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region. | |
8372 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen | |
8373 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the | |
8374 mouse in an xterm and other terminals. | |
8375 | |
8376 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'* | |
8377 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term') | |
8378 global | |
8379 {not in Vi} | |
8380 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not | |
8381 available when compiled without |+mouse|} | |
8382 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized. | |
1213 | 8383 Currently these strings are valid: |
7 | 8384 *xterm-mouse* |
8385 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
8386 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes: | |
8387 "s" = button state | |
8388 "c" = column plus 33 | |
8389 "r" = row plus 33 | |
5908 | 8390 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec", |
8391 "urxvt", and "sgr" for solutions. | |
7 | 8392 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the |
8393 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works | |
8394 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at | |
180 | 8395 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to |
7 | 8396 work. See below for how Vim detects this |
8397 automatically. | |
8398 *netterm-mouse* | |
8399 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates | |
8400 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers | |
8401 for the row and column. | |
8402 *dec-mouse* | |
8403 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a | |
8404 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[". | |
189 | 8405 This is also available for an Xterm, if it was |
8406 configured with "--enable-dec-locator". | |
7 | 8407 *jsbterm-mouse* |
8408 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling. | |
8409 *pterm-mouse* | |
8410 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling. | |
3224 | 8411 *urxvt-mouse* |
8412 urxvt Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal. | |
5908 | 8413 The mouse works only if the terminal supports this |
8414 encoding style, but it does not have 223 columns limit | |
8415 unlike "xterm" or "xterm2". | |
3750 | 8416 *sgr-mouse* |
8417 sgr Mouse handling for the terminal that emits SGR-styled | |
5908 | 8418 mouse reporting. The mouse works even in columns |
8419 beyond 223. This option is backward compatible with | |
8420 "xterm2" because it can also decode "xterm2" style | |
8421 mouse codes. | |
7 | 8422 |
8423 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm| | |
5908 | 8424 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm| |+mouse_jsbterm| |+mouse_urxvt| |
8425 |+mouse_sgr|. | |
7 | 8426 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always |
8427 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes | |
8428 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not | |
5908 | 8429 "xterm", "xterm2", "urxvt" or "sgr" (because dec mouse codes conflict |
8430 with them). | |
7 | 8431 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is |
10272
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8432 set to a name that starts with "xterm", "mlterm", "screen", "tmux", |
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8433 "st" (full match only), "st-" or "stterm", and 'ttymouse' is not set |
57b2b8268d3a
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/4575876dc865d4160f20d61bd822fbe7cafbec41
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
10261
diff
changeset
|
8434 already. |
5908 | 8435 Additionally, if vim is compiled with the |+termresponse| feature and |
8436 |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the xterm version | |
8437 number, more intelligent detection process runs. | |
7 | 8438 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be |
15131 | 8439 from 95 to 276. The "sgr" value will be set if Vim detects Mac |
8440 Terminal.app, iTerm2 or mintty, and when the xterm version is 277 or | |
8441 higher. | |
5908 | 8442 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" or "sgr" |
8443 automatically, set t_RV to an empty string: > | |
7 | 8444 :set t_RV= |
8445 < | |
8446 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'* | |
8447 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999) | |
8448 global | |
8449 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines | |
8450 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is | |
8451 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number, | |
8452 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying. | |
8453 | |
8454 *'ttytype'* *'tty'* | |
8455 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM) | |
8456 global | |
8457 Alias for 'term', see above. | |
8458 | |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8459 *'undodir'* *'udir'* |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8460 'undodir' 'udir' string (default ".") |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8461 global |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8462 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8463 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8464 List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8465 See |'backupdir'| for details of the format. |
2218
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8466 "." means using the directory of the file. The undo file name for |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8467 "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~". |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8468 For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited |
695ceebf17ca
Fix: :wundo didn't work in a buffer without a name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
8469 file, with path separators replaced with "%". |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8470 When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8471 works, no directories after "." will be used for writing. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8472 When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file. The first |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8473 undo file that exists is used. When it cannot be read an error is |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8474 given, no further entry is used. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8475 See |undo-persistence|. |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8476 |
4681
2eb30f341e8d
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
8477 *'undofile'* *'noundofile'* *'udf'* *'noudf'* |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8478 'undofile' 'udf' boolean (default off) |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8479 local to buffer |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8480 {not in Vi} |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8481 {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature} |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8482 When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8483 writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same |
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8484 file on buffer read. |
2220
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8485 The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'. |
b1c70c500de4
Found a way to make the MS-Windows installer wait for the uninstaller to
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2218
diff
changeset
|
8486 For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|. |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8487 The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8488 before a reload to be saved for undo. |
3920 | 8489 When 'undofile' is turned off the undo file is NOT deleted. |
11160 | 8490 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set. |
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2209
diff
changeset
|
8491 |
7 | 8492 *'undolevels'* *'ul'* |
8493 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS, | |
8494 Win32 and OS/2) | |
5446 | 8495 global or local to buffer |global-local| |
7 | 8496 {not in Vi} |
8497 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information | |
8498 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used | |
8499 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory). | |
8500 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes | |
8501 itself: > | |
8502 set ul=0 | |
8503 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in | |
8504 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo. | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
8505 Also see |undo-two-ways|. |
5446 | 8506 Set to -1 for no undo at all. You might want to do this only for the |
8507 current buffer: > | |
8508 setlocal ul=-1 | |
7 | 8509 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change. |
6336 | 8510 |
8511 The local value is set to -123456 when the global value is to be used. | |
8512 | |
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2240
diff
changeset
|
8513 Also see |clear-undo|. |
7 | 8514 |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8515 *'undoreload'* *'ur'* |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8516 'undoreload' 'ur' number (default 10000) |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8517 global |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8518 {not in Vi} |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8519 Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it. This applies to the |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8520 ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8521 Vim. |FileChangedShell| |
12559 | 8522 The save only happens when this option is negative or when the number |
2394
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8523 of lines is smaller than the value of this option. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8524 Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8525 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8526 When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read. |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8527 |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8528 Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory. Set |
a3aca345aafa
Add the 'undoreload' option to be able to undo a file reload.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2382
diff
changeset
|
8529 this option to a lower value if you run out of memory. |
7 | 8530 |
8531 *'updatecount'* *'uc'* | |
8532 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200) | |
8533 global | |
8534 {not in Vi} | |
8535 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to | |
8536 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on | |
8537 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting | |
8538 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly | |
8539 mode this option will be initialized to 10000. | |
8540 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|. | |
8541 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are | |
8542 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount' | |
8543 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted. | |
8544 Also see |'swapsync'|. | |
8545 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile" | |
8546 or "nowrite". | |
8547 | |
8548 *'updatetime'* *'ut'* | |
8549 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000) | |
8550 global | |
8551 {not in Vi} | |
8552 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be | |
8553 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the | |
8554 |CursorHold| autocommand event. | |
8555 | |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8556 *'varsofttabstop'* *'vsts'* |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8557 'varsofttabstop' 'vsts' string (default "") |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8558 local to buffer |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8559 {only available when compiled with the |+vartabs| |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8560 feature} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8561 {not in Vi} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8562 A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while editing, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8563 such as inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like variable- |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8564 width <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mixture of spaces |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8565 and <Tab>s is used. Tab widths are separated with commas, with the |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8566 final value applying to all subsequent tabs. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8567 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8568 For example, when editing assembly language files where statements |
14249
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8569 start in the 9th column and comments in the 41st, it may be useful |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8570 to use the following: > |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8571 :set varsofttabstop=8,32,8 |
14249
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8572 < This will set soft tabstops with 8 and 8 + 32 spaces, and 8 more |
4543777545a3
Updated runtime and language files.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14175
diff
changeset
|
8573 for every column thereafter. |
14175
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8574 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8575 Note that the value of |'softtabstop'| will be ignored while |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8576 'varsofttabstop' is set. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8577 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8578 *'vartabstop'* *'vts'* |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8579 'vartabstop' 'vts' string (default "") |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8580 local to buffer |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8581 {only available when compiled with the |+vartabs| |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8582 feature} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8583 {not in Vi} |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8584 A list of the number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8585 separated by commas. Each value corresponds to one tab, with the |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8586 final value applying to all subsequent tabs. For example: > |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8587 :set vartabstop=4,20,10,8 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8588 < This will make the first tab 4 spaces wide, the second 20 spaces, |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8589 the third 10 spaces, and all following tabs 8 spaces. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8590 |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8591 Note that the value of |'tabstop'| will be ignored while 'vartabstop' |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8592 is set. |
2ad722003b36
patch 8.1.0105: all tab stops are the same
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
14019
diff
changeset
|
8593 |
7 | 8594 *'verbose'* *'vbs'* |
8595 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0) | |
8596 global | |
8597 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean | |
8598 verbose option} | |
8599 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing. | |
8600 Currently, these messages are given: | |
8601 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written. | |
8602 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed. | |
712 | 8603 >= 5 Every searched tags file and include file. |
7 | 8604 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed. |
8605 >= 9 Every executed autocommand. | |
8606 >= 12 Every executed function. | |
8607 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded. | |
8608 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause. | |
8609 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters). | |
8610 | |
8611 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|. | |
8612 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command. | |
8613 | |
293 | 8614 When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not |
8615 displayed. | |
8616 | |
8617 *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'* | |
8618 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty) | |
8619 global | |
8620 {not in Vi} | |
8621 When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name. | |
8622 When the file exists messages are appended. | |
8623 Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made | |
2265
b7cb69ab616d
Added salt to blowfish encryption.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2250
diff
changeset
|
8624 empty. Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time. |
293 | 8625 Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first. |
8626 The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not | |
8627 displayed when 'verbosefile' is set. | |
8628 | |
7 | 8629 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'* |
8630 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32: | |
8631 "$VIM/vimfiles/view", | |
8632 for Unix: "~/.vim/view", | |
8633 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view" | |
8634 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view" | |
8635 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view") | |
8636 global | |
8637 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8638 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 8639 feature} |
8640 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|. | |
8641 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
8642 security reasons. | |
8643 | |
8644 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'* | |
12824
79a754456110
patch 8.0.1289: mkview always includes the local directory
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12802
diff
changeset
|
8645 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor,curdir") |
7 | 8646 global |
8647 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8648 {not available when compiled without the |+mksession| |
7 | 8649 feature} |
8650 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated | |
10 | 8651 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something: |
7 | 8652 word save and restore ~ |
8653 cursor cursor position in file and in window | |
8654 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local | |
8655 fold options | |
8656 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not | |
8657 global values for local options) | |
6213 | 8658 localoptions same as "options" |
7 | 8659 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward |
8660 slashes | |
8661 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when | |
8662 on Windows or DOS | |
12824
79a754456110
patch 8.0.1289: mkview always includes the local directory
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
12802
diff
changeset
|
8663 curdir the window-local directory, if set with `:lcd` |
7 | 8664 |
8665 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files | |
8666 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts, | |
8667 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts. | |
8668 | |
8669 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528* | |
8670 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS, | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8671 Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:, |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8672 for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2: |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
8673 for others: '100,<50,s10,h) |
7 | 8674 global |
8675 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
8676 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| |
7 | 8677 feature} |
8678 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written | |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8679 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). Except when 'viminfofile' is |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8680 "NONE". |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8681 The string should be a comma separated list of parameters, each |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8682 consisting of a single character identifying the particular parameter, |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8683 followed by a number or string which specifies the value of that |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8684 parameter. If a particular character is left out, then the default |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8685 value is used for that parameter. The following is a list of the |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8686 identifying characters and the effect of their value. |
7 | 8687 CHAR VALUE ~ |
3224 | 8688 *viminfo-!* |
7 | 8689 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start |
8690 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase | |
8691 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis" | |
2607 | 8692 and "_K_L_M" are not. Nested List and Dict items may not be |
2642 | 8693 read back correctly, you end up with an empty item. |
3224 | 8694 *viminfo-quote* |
7 | 8695 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of |
8696 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a | |
8697 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the | |
8698 start of a comment! | |
3224 | 8699 *viminfo-%* |
7 | 8700 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is |
8701 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not | |
8702 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the | |
7272
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8703 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Quickfix |
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8704 ('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on |
17333ebd2bbd
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/d042dc825c9b97dacd84d4728f88300da4d5b6b9
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7266
diff
changeset
|
8705 removable media (|viminfo-r|) are not saved. |
23 | 8706 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum |
8707 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all | |
8708 buffers are stored. | |
3224 | 8709 *viminfo-'* |
7 | 8710 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks |
8711 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when | |
8712 'viminfo' is non-empty. | |
8713 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the | |
8714 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file. | |
3224 | 8715 *viminfo-/* |
7 | 8716 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be |
10 | 8717 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute |
7 | 8718 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of |
8719 'history' is used. | |
3224 | 8720 *viminfo-:* |
7 | 8721 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be |
10 | 8722 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
3224 | 8723 *viminfo-<* |
7 | 8724 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then |
8725 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are | |
8726 saved. '"' is the old name for this item. | |
8727 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte. | |
3224 | 8728 *viminfo-@* |
7 | 8729 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be |
10 | 8730 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used. |
3224 | 8731 *viminfo-c* |
7 | 8732 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the |
8733 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current | |
233 | 8734 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|. |
3224 | 8735 *viminfo-f* |
7 | 8736 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0 |
8737 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when | |
10 | 8738 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current |
7 | 8739 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo"). |
3224 | 8740 *viminfo-h* |
7 | 8741 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo |
8742 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch" | |
8743 has been used since the last search command. | |
3224 | 8744 *viminfo-n* |
7 | 8745 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8746 the 'n'. Must be at the end of the option! If the |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8747 'viminfofile' option is set, that file name overrides the one |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8748 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are |
9464
be72f4201a1d
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/063b9d15abea041a5bfff3ffc4e219e26fd1d4fa
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9407
diff
changeset
|
8749 expanded when opening the file, not when setting the option. |
3224 | 8750 *viminfo-r* |
7 | 8751 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next |
8752 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each | |
8753 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be | |
8754 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you | |
8755 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can | |
8756 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is | |
8757 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50 | |
8758 characters. | |
3224 | 8759 *viminfo-s* |
7 | 8760 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are |
8761 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default | |
8762 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text. | |
8763 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit. | |
8764 | |
8765 Example: > | |
8766 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo | |
8767 < | |
8768 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you | |
8769 edited. | |
8770 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be | |
8771 remembered. | |
8772 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped. | |
8773 :0 Command-line history will not be saved. | |
8774 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo". | |
8775 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used, | |
8776 that is, save all of the search history, and also the | |
8777 previous search and substitute patterns. | |
8778 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back. | |
8779 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored. | |
8780 | |
8781 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to | |
8782 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically. | |
8783 | |
8784 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for | |
8785 security reasons. | |
11160 | 8786 NOTE: This option is set to the Vim default value when 'compatible' |
8787 is reset. | |
7 | 8788 |
11666
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8789 *'viminfofile'* *'vif'* |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8790 'viminfofile' 'vif' string (default: "") |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8791 global |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8792 {not in Vi} |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8793 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo| |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8794 feature} |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8795 When non-empty, overrides the file name used for viminfo. |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8796 When equal to "NONE" no viminfo file will be read or written. |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8797 This option can be set with the |-i| command line flag. The |--clean| |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8798 command line flag sets it to "NONE". |
5cd9ba96561d
patch 8.0.0716: not easy to start Vim cleanly
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11659
diff
changeset
|
8799 |
7 | 8800 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'* |
8801 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "") | |
8802 global | |
8803 {not in Vi} | |
8804 {not available when compiled without the | |
8805 |+virtualedit| feature} | |
8806 A comma separated list of these words: | |
8807 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode. | |
8808 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode. | |
8809 all Allow virtual editing in all modes. | |
772 | 8810 onemore Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line |
782 | 8811 |
7 | 8812 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is |
1263 | 8813 no actual character. This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end |
7 | 8814 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and |
8815 editing a table. | |
772 | 8816 "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just |
8817 after the last character of the line. This makes some commands more | |
8818 consistent. Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line | |
8819 if the line was empty. But it is far from Vi compatible. It may also | |
782 | 8820 break some plugins or Vim scripts. For example because |l| can move |
8821 the cursor after the last character. Use with care! | |
5220 | 8822 Using the `$` command will move to the last character in the line, not |
782 | 8823 past it. This may actually move the cursor to the left! |
5220 | 8824 The `g$` command will move to the end of the screen line. |
772 | 8825 It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will |
8826 not get a warning for it. | |
11160 | 8827 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set. |
7 | 8828 |
8829 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep* | |
8830 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off) | |
8831 global | |
8832 {not in Vi} | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8833 Use a visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the |
7 | 8834 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted, |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8835 use: > |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8836 :set vb t_vb= |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8837 < If you want a short flash, you can use this on many terminals: > |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8838 :set vb t_vb=[?5h$<100>[?5l |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8839 < Here $<100> specifies the time, you can use a smaller or bigger value |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8840 to get a shorter or longer flash. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8841 |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8842 Note: Vim will limit the bell to once per half a second. This avoids |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8843 having to wait for the flashing to finish when there are lots of |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8844 bells, e.g. on key repeat. This also happens without 'visualbell' |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8845 set. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8846 |
7 | 8847 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display |
8848 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f", | |
8849 where 40 is the time in msec. | |
11659
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8850 |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8851 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8852 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|. |
49c12c93abf3
Updated runtime files and translations.
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11529
diff
changeset
|
8853 |
7 | 8854 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash. |
8855 Also see 'errorbells'. | |
8856 | |
8857 *'warn'* *'nowarn'* | |
8858 'warn' boolean (default on) | |
8859 global | |
8860 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer | |
8861 has been changed. | |
8862 | |
8863 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'* | |
8864 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off) | |
8865 global | |
8866 {not in Vi} | |
667 | 8867 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option. |
7 | 8868 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x. |
8869 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and | |
8870 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running. | |
8871 | |
8872 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'* | |
8873 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "") | |
8874 global | |
8875 {not in Vi} | |
8876 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the | |
8877 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in | |
8878 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys: | |
8879 char key mode ~ | |
8880 b <BS> Normal and Visual | |
8881 s <Space> Normal and Visual | |
712 | 8882 h "h" Normal and Visual (not recommended) |
8883 l "l" Normal and Visual (not recommended) | |
7 | 8884 < <Left> Normal and Visual |
8885 > <Right> Normal and Visual | |
8886 ~ "~" Normal | |
8887 [ <Left> Insert and Replace | |
8888 ] <Right> Insert and Replace | |
8889 For example: > | |
8890 :set ww=<,>,[,] | |
8891 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used. | |
8892 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change | |
8893 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h" | |
8894 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This | |
8895 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and | |
8896 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping | |
8897 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the | |
8898 cursor. | |
714 | 8899 When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a |
8900 line then it will not move to the next line. This makes "dl", "cl", | |
8901 "yl" etc. work normally. | |
7 | 8902 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is |
8903 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8904 | |
8905 *'wildchar'* *'wc'* | |
8906 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E) | |
8907 global | |
8908 {not in Vi} | |
8909 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the | |
8910 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'. | |
1621 | 8911 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 8912 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See |
8913 'wildcharm' for that. | |
8914 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: > | |
8915 :set wc=<Esc> | |
8916 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is | |
8917 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset. | |
8918 | |
8919 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'* | |
8920 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0)) | |
8921 global | |
8922 {not in Vi} | |
8923 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is | |
233 | 8924 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line |
8925 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally | |
7 | 8926 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that |
8927 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: > | |
8928 :set wcm=<C-Z> | |
1621 | 8929 :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z> |
7 | 8930 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N. |
8931 | |
8932 *'wildignore'* *'wig'* | |
8933 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "") | |
8934 global | |
8935 {not in Vi} | |
8936 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
8937 feature} | |
8938 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these | |
3682 | 8939 patterns is ignored when expanding |wildcards|, completing file or |
8940 directory names, and influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and | |
8941 |globpath()| unless a flag is passed to disable this. | |
7 | 8942 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|. |
8943 Also see 'suffixes'. | |
8944 Example: > | |
8945 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj | |
8946 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing | |
8947 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version | |
8948 uses another default. | |
8949 | |
2652 | 8950 |
2662 | 8951 *'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'* |
2652 | 8952 'wildignorecase' 'wic' boolean (default off) |
8953 global | |
8954 {not in Vi} | |
8955 When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories. | |
4242 | 8956 Has no effect when 'fileignorecase' is set. |
2652 | 8957 Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which |
8958 happens when there are special characters. | |
8959 | |
8960 | |
7 | 8961 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'* |
9669
284b4eb307fc
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/8c08b5b569e2a9e9f63dea514591ecfa2d3bb392
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9665
diff
changeset
|
8962 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off, set in |defaults.vim|) |
7 | 8963 global |
8964 {not in Vi} | |
8965 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu| | |
8966 feature} | |
8967 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced | |
8968 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion, | |
8969 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the | |
8970 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is | |
8971 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or | |
8972 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match. | |
8973 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is | |
8974 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode. | |
4159 | 8975 You can check the current mode with |wildmenumode()|. |
7 | 8976 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on |
8977 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls | |
8978 as needed. | |
8979 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used | |
8980 for selecting a completion. | |
8981 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special | |
8982 meanings: | |
8983 | |
8984 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N) | |
8985 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a | |
8986 subdirectory or submenu. | |
8987 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a | |
8988 dot: move into a submenu. | |
8989 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into | |
8990 parent directory or parent menu. | |
8991 | |
8992 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|. | |
8993 | |
8994 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead | |
8995 of selecting a different match, use this: > | |
8996 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left> | |
8997 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right> | |
8998 < | |
8999 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match | |
9000 |hl-WildMenu|. | |
9001 | |
9002 *'wildmode'* *'wim'* | |
9003 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full") | |
9004 global | |
9005 {not in Vi} | |
9006 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with | |
10 | 9007 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each |
1152 | 9008 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'. The |
7 | 9009 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar', |
9010 The second part for the second use, etc. | |
9011 These are the possible values for each part: | |
9012 "" Complete only the first match. | |
9013 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match, | |
9014 the original string is used and then the first match | |
9015 again. | |
9016 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't | |
9017 result in a longer string, use the next part. | |
9018 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is | |
9019 enabled. | |
9020 "list" When more than one match, list all matches. | |
9021 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
9022 complete first match. | |
9023 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and | |
9024 complete till longest common string. | |
9025 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases. | |
9026 | |
9027 Examples: > | |
9028 :set wildmode=full | |
233 | 9029 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) > |
7 | 9030 :set wildmode=longest,full |
9031 < Complete longest common string, then each full match > | |
9032 :set wildmode=list:full | |
9033 < List all matches and complete each full match > | |
9034 :set wildmode=list,full | |
9035 < List all matches without completing, then each full match > | |
9036 :set wildmode=longest,list | |
9037 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives. | |
1621 | 9038 More info here: |cmdline-completion|. |
7 | 9039 |
40 | 9040 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'* |
9041 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "") | |
9042 global | |
9043 {not in Vi} | |
9044 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore| | |
9045 feature} | |
9046 A list of words that change how command line completion is done. | |
9047 Currently only one word is allowed: | |
9048 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of | |
856 | 9049 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match |
40 | 9050 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are: |
9051 d #define | |
9052 f function | |
9053 Also see |cmdline-completion|. | |
9054 | |
7 | 9055 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'* |
9056 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu") | |
9057 global | |
9058 {not in Vi} | |
9059 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI} | |
9060 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT | |
9061 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the | |
9062 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and | |
9063 entering special characters. This option tells what to do: | |
9064 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be | |
9065 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be | |
9066 done with the |:simalt| command. | |
9067 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key | |
9068 combinations cannot be mapped. | |
9069 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu | |
10 | 9070 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other |
7 | 9071 keys can be mapped. |
9072 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT | |
9073 key is never used for the menu. | |
36 | 9074 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will |
9075 select the menu, unless it has been mapped. | |
7 | 9076 |
164 | 9077 *'window'* *'wi'* |
9078 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1) | |
9079 global | |
9080 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window, | |
9081 use 'lines' for that. | |
179 | 9082 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the |
9083 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll | |
9084 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one. | |
164 | 9085 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll |
9086 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines. | |
9087 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than | |
9088 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1. | |
9089 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines} | |
9090 | |
7 | 9091 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591* |
9092 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1) | |
9093 global | |
9094 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9095 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9096 feature} |
9097 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard | |
10 | 9098 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the |
1621 | 9099 focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the |
9100 cost of the height of other windows. | |
9101 Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing. | |
9102 Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen. | |
9103 Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high. This has the drawback | |
9104 that ":all" will create only two windows. To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4" | |
9105 to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done, | |
9106 using the |VimEnter| event: > | |
9107 au VimEnter * set winheight=999 | |
9108 < Minimum value is 1. | |
9109 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the | |
7 | 9110 height of the current window. |
9111 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set | |
9112 the minimal height for other windows. | |
9113 | |
9114 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'* | |
9115 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off) | |
9116 local to window | |
9117 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9118 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9119 feature} |
9120 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 9121 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. Set by default for the |
9122 |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|. | |
7 | 9123 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
9124 | |
782 | 9125 *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'* |
9126 'winfixwidth' 'wfw' boolean (default off) | |
9127 local to window | |
9128 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9129 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
782 | 9130 feature} |
9131 Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and | |
1152 | 9132 'equalalways' is set. Also for |CTRL-W_=|. |
782 | 9133 The width may be changed anyway when running out of room. |
9134 | |
7 | 9135 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'* |
9136 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1) | |
9137 global | |
9138 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9139 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| |
7 | 9140 feature} |
9141 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
9142 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
9143 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a | |
9144 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when | |
9145 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.) | |
9146 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window. | |
9147 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
9148 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
9149 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable. | |
9150 | |
9151 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'* | |
9152 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1) | |
9153 global | |
9154 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9155 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 9156 feature} |
9157 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window. | |
9158 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller. | |
9159 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just | |
9160 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one | |
9161 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere | |
9162 to go.) | |
9163 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window. | |
9164 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a | |
9165 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few | |
9166 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable. | |
9167 | |
12138
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9168 *'winptydll'* |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9169 'winptydll' string (default "winpty32.dll" or "winpty64.dll") |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9170 global |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9171 {not in Vi} |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9172 {only available when compiled with the |terminal| |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9173 feature on MS-Windows} |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9174 Specifies the name of the winpty shared library, used for the |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9175 |:terminal| command. The default depends on whether was build as a |
12254 | 9176 32-bit or 64-bit executable. If not found, "winpty.dll" is tried as |
12138
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9177 a fallback. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9178 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9179 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9180 security reasons. |
bee3751f3d4e
patch 8.0.0949: winpty.dll name is fixed
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
9181 |
7 | 9182 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592* |
9183 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20) | |
9184 global | |
9185 {not in Vi} | |
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
9186 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit| |
7 | 9187 feature} |
9188 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard | |
9189 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If | |
9190 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of | |
9191 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window | |
9192 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing. | |
9193 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the | |
9194 width of the current window. | |
9195 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set | |
9196 the minimal width for other windows. | |
9197 | |
9198 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'* | |
9199 'wrap' boolean (default on) | |
9200 local to window | |
9201 {not in Vi} | |
9202 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text | |
9203 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that. | |
9204 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and | |
10 | 9205 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap |
9206 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is | |
7 | 9207 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll |
9208 horizontally. | |
9209 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See | |
9210 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary. | |
9211 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: > | |
9212 :set sidescroll=5 | |
9213 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:> | |
9214 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|. | |
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
9215 This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is |
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1904
diff
changeset
|
9216 on. |
7 | 9217 |
9218 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'* | |
9219 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0) | |
9220 local to buffer | |
9221 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping | |
9222 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted | |
9223 and inserting continues on the next line. | |
9224 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause | |
9225 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible. | |
9226 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used. | |
7147
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
9227 This option is set to 0 when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' |
c590de398af9
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/ca63501fbcd1cf9c8aa9ff12c093c95b62a89ed7
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
7080
diff
changeset
|
9228 is reset. |
7 | 9229 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently |
9230 and less usefully} | |
9231 | |
9232 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'* | |
9233 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385* | |
9234 global | |
500 | 9235 Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and |
9236 |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes. | |
7 | 9237 |
9238 *'write'* *'nowrite'* | |
9239 'write' boolean (default on) | |
9240 global | |
9241 {not in Vi} | |
9242 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed. | |
9243 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are | |
10 | 9244 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line |
7 | 9245 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires |
9246 writing a temporary file. | |
9247 | |
9248 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'* | |
9249 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off) | |
9250 global | |
9251 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override. | |
9252 | |
9253 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'* | |
9254 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off | |
9255 otherwise) | |
9256 global | |
9257 {not in Vi} | |
9258 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after | |
9259 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is | |
3513 | 9260 also on. |
9261 WARNING: Switching this option off means that when Vim fails to write | |
9262 your buffer correctly and then, for whatever reason, Vim exits, you | |
9263 lose both the original file and what you were writing. Only reset | |
9264 this option if your file system is almost full and it makes the write | |
9265 fail (and make sure not to exit Vim until the write was successful). | |
9266 See |backup-table| for another explanation. | |
7 | 9267 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway. |
9268 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is | |
9269 set. | |
9270 | |
9271 *'writedelay'* *'wd'* | |
9272 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0) | |
9273 global | |
9274 {not in Vi} | |
9344
33c1b85d408c
commit https://github.com/vim/vim/commit/802a0d902fca423acb15f835d7b09183883d79a0
Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
parents:
9286
diff
changeset
|
9275 The number of milliseconds to wait for each character sent to the |
7 | 9276 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by |
9277 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes. | |
9278 | |
14421 | 9279 vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: |